Home
        INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISH
         Contents
1.                   p 313  Creative Zone Modes                       p 314   P  Program AE                     p 314   Tv  Shutter priority AE                  p 314   Av  Aperture priority AE               p 314  AF  AF Mode                           p 315  AF Point                          p 315  ISO  ISO Speed                          p 316    Drive Mode                         p 316   4g Live View Shooting                      p 317       Shooting Movies                    p 318    Image Playback                             p 319       Quick Reference Guide memm    Menu Operations              lt MENU gt     button   lt   gt  button  LCD         monitor   lt i gt   Cross keys                1  Press the  lt MENU gt  button to display the menu    2  Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select a tab  then press the  lt  AV  gt   key to select the desired item    3  Press  lt   gt  to display the setting    4  After setting the item  press  lt   gt      Basic Zone Modes Movie Shooting Mode       Movie exposure Auto  AF mode Live mode  AF w  shutter button during        Release shutter without card  Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct     mShutter AE lock button  Remote control Disable   Highlight tone priority    Red eye reduc  Disable       Modes Quality iL    Beep Enable  Release shutter without card    Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct  Red eye reduc  Disable  Flash control       Menu items Menu settings    308    Quick Reference Guide    Image recordi
2.             A Exit the setting       Press the  lt MENU gt  button    gt  The print order screen will reappear       Next  select  Sel Image    By fi   or   All image  to order the images to be  printed     Q e Even if  Date  and  File No   are set to  On   the date or file No  might not  be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model      When printing with DPOF  you must use the card whose print order  specifications have been set  It will not work if you just extract images  from the card and try to print them    e  Certain DPOF compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able  to print the images as you specified  If this happens with your printer   refer to the printer   s instruction manual  Or check with your photofinisher  about compatibility when ordering prints    e Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a  different camera and then try to specify a print order  The print order may  not work or may be overwritten  Also  depending on the image type  the  print order may not be possible     F e  RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered  You can print RAW  images through direct printing  p 236      With  Index  prints  both the  Date  and  File No   cannot be set to  On   at the same time     246    Digital Print Order Format  DPOF   SSS ee SS ae ae    Print Ordering       Sel lmage    DPrint order Select and order images one by one   O Standard 7 prints To display the three image display  press      Index 2 i
3.             Q Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor     Fl   When not using the camera  close the LCD monitor back with the screen  facing inward  This will protect the screen   e During Live View shooting or movie shooting  facing the LCD monitor  toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen   e Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor  the display may turn off right  before the LCD monitor is closed     31    Turning on the Power laa    If you turn on the power switch and the date time setting screen  appears  see page 34 to set the date time         lt ON gt    The camera turns on     lt OFF gt    The camera is turned off and  does not operate  Set to this  position when not using the  camera        About the Automatic Self Cleaning Sensor      Whenever you set the power switch to  lt ON gt  or  lt OFF gt   the sensor  cleaning will be executed automatically  During the sensor cleaning   the LCD monitor will display  lt     4  gt   Even during the sensor  cleaning  you can still shoot by pressing the shutter button halfway   p 40  to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture       If you repeatedly turn the power switch  lt ON gt   lt OFF gt  at a short  interval  the  lt     4  gt  icon might not be displayed  This is normal and  not a problem     1 About Auto Power Off    e To save battery power  the camera turns off automatically after about  30 seconds of non operation  To turn on the camera again  just  press the 
4.         External microphone              aM  Stereo AV Cable AVC DC400ST   1 3 m 4 3 ft         EOS Solution EOS Software  Disk Instruction Manuals  Disk    cocoococooococooo    Interface Cable   1 3 m 4 3 ft       ea    Interface Cable IFC 200U 500U   1 9 m 6 2 ft      4 7 m 15 4 ft   J   gt     S     ee        SD SDHC SDXC  memory card    LE n                   Card reader       HDMI Cable  eeeecceccecceeceeceeoeeeeeeeeeeeoee HTC 100  2 9 mO 5 ft              EF lenses EF S lenses                      TV Video    J  PictBridge compatible printer                      Computer    Windows 7  Windows Vista  Windows XP  Mac OS X         Card slot      The length of all cables is approx    m   ft     277    Troubleshooting Guide sx    If a problem occurs with the camera  first refer to this Troubleshooting  Guide  If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem   contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center     Power Related Problems    The battery pack does not recharge       Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery  Pack LP E8     The battery charger   s lamp blinks        fthere is a problem with the battery charger  the protective circuit will  stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange  If  this happens  disconnect the charger   s power plug from the power  outlet and remove the battery pack  Attach the battery pack to the  charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a  power outlet ag
5.         Reference 259    Using a Household Power Outlet            cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesneeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 260  Remote Control Shooting   External Speedlites  Using Eye Fi Cards s  Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes  268  Menu Settings     System Map       Troubleshooting Guide    Error Codes  Specifications                    Safety WarningS   sii asasan irise ane AE AASA Aate  Software Start Guide 301  Software  Start Gussa enan h eiers eaea anaren A EAEn AAAA EEA RASA EA 302    Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index 307    Handling Precautions sx    Camera Care   e This camera is a precision instrument  Do not drop it or subject it to physical  shock    e  The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater  If you  accidentally drop the camera into water  promptly consult your nearest  Canon Service Center  Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth  If the  camera has been exposed to salty air  wipe it with a well wrung wet cloth    e  Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such  as a magnet or electric motor  Also avoid using or leaving the camera near  anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna  Strong  magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data    e Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct  sunlight  High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction      The camera contains precision electronic circuitry  Never atte
6.        Microphone  reduction       O  p 142   Self timer So   lamp  p 91 89  a  lt  gt  Flash    button  p 90   Remote control  sensor     p 122 261     Grip N    Mirror  p 122 187     Terminal cover    Contacts  p 15   p 15  Lens release button    Lens mount  p 37     Lens lock pin button  p 98     Audio video OUT   Digital terminal  p 221 236        Remote control  terminal  p 262     Body cap  p 36  External microphone  IN terminal  p 160     HDMI mini OUT  terminal  p 218              Depth of field preview 3  1  1  1  1  1             18    Nomenclature    Eyecup  p 262          Dioptric adjustment knob  p 39     m     lt  gt  Live View shooting   Movie shooting button    Viewfinder eyepiece  p 124 142    lt    EQ  gt  AE lock   FE lock button   Index Reduce button   lt    gt  Info butt  INEOS Info button  p 107 108 202 204 243   fA                 p 47 71 126 146 175    lt 56 gt     AF point selection   Magnify button   p 85 204 243                     lt MENU gt  Menu     ZAAN  button  p 43   Speaker   p 212   LCD monitor   p 31 43 167  Card slot    cover  p 29     DC cord hole   p 260            lt  AvA  gt  Aperture   Exposure compensation  button  p 99 103     Tripod socket Access lamp  p 30      lt     amp  gt  Quick Control button    Direct print button  p 41 241              Battery compartment  cover release lever  p 28        Battery compartment cover   p 28      lt  gt  Erase button  p 224               lt   gt   gt  Playback button  p 71               lt   gt
7.       Default set     Set the parameter   e Press the  lt  lt P gt  key to adjust the  parameter as desired  then press  Picture Style  lt     gt    aera    Press the  lt MENU gt  button to save  the adjusted parameters  The Picture  Style selection screen will reappear   Paani  gt  Any parameter settings different from  the default will be displayed in blue     ced m  Be  G0 ca       112    3 2  Customizing Image Characteristics      Parameter Settings and Effects       Sharpness  Adjusts the sharpness of the image   To make it less sharp  set it toward the   end  The closer it is to W   the softer the image will look   To make it sharper  set it toward the fd end  The closer it is to Kd  the  sharper the image will look        Contrast  Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors   To decrease the contrast  set it toward the minus end  The closer it is  to HJ  the blander the image will look   To increase the contrast  set it toward the plus end  The closer it is to  E  the crisper the image will look     S Saturation  The image   s color saturation can be adjusted   To decrease the color saturation  set it toward the minus end  The  closer it is to HJ  the more diluted the colors will look   To increase the color saturation  set it toward the plus end  The  closer it is to EJ  the bolder the colors will look        Color tone  The skin tones can be adjusted   To make the skin tone redder  set it toward the minus end  The  closer it is to M  the redder the skin t
8.      150    MMW Setting the Movie recording Size  a lM se      Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute   Due to limitations of the file system  movie shooting will stop  automatically if the file size of a single movie clip reaches 4GB  It takes  approx  11 min  at  1920x1080  and  1280x720  or approx  46 min  at   640x480  to reach 4 GB file size  To resume movie shooting  press the   lt  gt  button   A new movie file starts being recorded         Movie recording Total Recording Time  approx   File Size   Size 4GB Card   8GB Card   16GB Card    approx    Bo   1920x1080  Is 11 min  22 min  44 min  330 MB min   Ty   60 i         1280x720  T 11 min  22 min  44 min  330 MB min   50  Bo     640x480  T 46 min  1 hr  32 min   3hr  4min    82 5 MB min   25                                                    Q e An increase of the camera   s internal temperature may cause movie  shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table  above  p 163      The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min  59 sec   Depending on the subject and the increase in the camera   s internal  temperature  the movie shooting might stop sooner than 29 min  59 sec     F With ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser  provided software  p 302   you can  extract still photos from a movie  The still image quality will be as follows   Approx  2 1 megapixels at  1920x1080   approx  920 000 pixels at   1280x720   and approx  310 000 pixels at  640x480      151    mam Using Movie Digital Zo
9.      Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings    Turning the LCD Monitor Off On  Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color       Setting the Flash      a Automatic Sensor Cleaning   Appending Dust Delete Data     Manual Sensor Cleaning    8 Wireless Flash Photography 189    USING Wireless  RASH sortiras era ieena Aii E AE RANE AANS  Easy Wireless Flash Shooting  Custom Wireless Flash Shooting    2  Other Settings sacate A anaa EEN                                            9 Image Playback  m fai Searching for Images Quickly     Q Q Magnified View   f  Rotating the Image  Setting Ratings   Q  Quick Control During Playback          Enjoying Movies           12    Contents    10    11    12    13    14  15            Pee Playing  MOVIES  ciate NE A E E REN  X Editing a Movie   s First and Last Scenes     Slide Show  Auto Playback    Viewing the Images on TV      Protecting Images      T Erasing Images    INFO  Shooting Information Display             ccseesceceseeseeeseeeseseeteeneeeeeaeeeeeeees  Post Processing Images 229    Creative Filters 0 0    ccc cccccccscscsesscscsesecscsssecsesssecscsesecsesscsesesscacseeecseseeeas 230  Ba  FRESIZ  EAE ooh Ll ERO Eee Re La N 233  Printing Images 235  Preparing to Print        A Printing   Trimming the Image  9 Digital Print Order Format  DPOF   Us   gt   Direct Printing with  DPOF  ca 4ctascctssseetasanctninncia beaeeaaae           Customizing the Camera  Setting Custom Functions      Custom Function Settings  Registering My Menu
10.      copies    Print                   Printing Effect    Description       The image will be printed according to the printer   s standard                   MOn colors  The image   s Exif data is used to make automatic  corrections    Moff No automatic correction will be applied    F3VIVID The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce  more vivid blues and greens    ANR Image noise is reduced before printing    B W B W Prints in black and white with true blacks        B W Cool tone    Prints in black and white with cool  bluish blacks        B W Warm tone    Prints in black and white with warm  yellowish blacks        Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast  No                   Natural automatic color adjustments are applied   The printing characteristics are the same as the    Natural     Natural M setting  However  this setting enables finer printing  adjustments than with    Natural      FalDefault The printing will differ depending on the printer  For details        see the printer   s instruction manual          When you change the printing effects  it is reflected in the image displayed on  the upper left  Note that the printed image might look slightly different from the  displayed image which is only an approximation  This also applies to   Brightness  and  Adjust levels  on page 242     240        Printing       5 Set the date and file number    FAL  Both imprinting   Oy 1 copies  Trang e  Set as necessary   RJ 9x13cm Paper settings    Sele
11.      f the    30    shutter speed and the maximum aperture  blink  it indicates underexposure  Increase the ISO  speed or use flash       f the    4000    shutter speed and the minimum aperture  blink  it indicates overexposure  Decrease the ISO  speed        F Differences Between  lt P gt  and  lt  4J  gt   Scene Intelligent Auto   With  lt G  gt   many functions such the AF mode  drive mode  and built in  flash are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots  The functions you can  set are limited  With  lt P gt   only the shutter speed and aperture are set  automatically  You can freely set the AF mode  drive mode  built in flash   and other functions  p 268      75    m Setting the Image recording Quality      You can select the pixel count and the image quality  Ten image   recording quality settings are provided  ML  ML  AM  aM  AS    S1  S2   3  G0  M  AL             1 Select  Quality     cua   Under the  A  tab  select  Quality    e    nelas shutter without card then press  lt    gt     Image review 2 sec   gt   Quality  will appear    Pixel count Select the image recording   Possible shots quality   Quality   The respective quality   s pixel count    and number of possible shots will be  displayed to help you select the  desired quality  Then press  lt   gt      AL 18M 5184x3456   1514     AL aL 4M aM 4S1 4S1  S2 S3   L       Guide to Image recording Quality Settings  Approx                                                                        Qualit Pixels Recorded 
12.      lt MENU gt  button         Li    _    lt   gt  button  LCD monitor 4        lt  lt  gt  gt  Cross keys                Menu Screen    In the Basic Zone  Movie shooting mode  and Creative Zone  the tabs  and menu options displayed will be different           Basic Zone modes Movie shooting mode    Quality a  Beep Enable  Release shutter without card    Movie exposure Auto  AF mode Live mode  AF w  shutter button during       mShutter AE lock button   mote control Disable    Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct     Red eye reduc  Disable    Highlight tone priority             Creative Zone modes        Set up   T Playback  Or Shooting X  My Menu                    Quality a  Beep Enable  Release shutter without card  Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct   Red eye reduc  Disable  Flash control    Menu items    CEM Menu Operations     I   S    Menu Setting Procedure          h  Display the menu screen    Quality aL e Press the  lt MENU gt  button to display   Beep Enable   Release shutter without card the menu screen    Image review 2 sec    Peripheral illumin  correct  Select a tab    MOREEL e Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select a  menu tab    a  3 Select the desired item    Quality   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the   a item  th  lt  gt    Release shutter without card item  then press      Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct   Red eye reduc  Disable    Select the setting      Press the  lt AV gt  or  lt   lt P gt  key to  selec
13.     Charge lamp  Full charge lamp f          IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS   DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK   CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS    For connection to a supply not in the U S A   use an attachment plug adapter  of the proper configuration for the power outlet  if needed              Battery Charger LC E8E  Charger for Battery Pack LP E8  p 26      Battery pack slot  Charge lamp JA  Full charge lamp           S lt  TR               Power cord    Power cord socket      24    Getting Started    This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start  shooting and basic camera operations     Attaching the Strap  Pass the end of the strap through  the camera   s strap mount eyelet  from the bottom  Then pass it  through the strap   s buckle as shown  in the illustration  Pull the strap to  take up any slack and make sure  the strap will not loosen from the         buckle     The eyepiece cover is also  attached to the strap  p 262         Eyepiece cover       Charging the Battery mE       Remove the protective cover     e Detach the protective cover provided  with the battery               2 Attach the battery    e Asshown in the illustration  attach the  battery securely to the charger      To detach the battery  follow the  above procedure in reverse        Recharge the battery    For LC E8   e As shown by the arrow  flip out the  battery charger   s prongs and insert  the prongs into a power outlet     For LC E8E  LC
14.     High ISO speeds will result in grainier images     F Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    if  2  ISO expansion  is set to  1   On      H     equivalent to ISO 12800  can also be set  p 252      Q   Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    if  6  Highlight tone priority  is  set to  1  Enable   ISO 100 and    H     equivalent to ISO 12800  cannot be  selected  p 254       Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier   Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image      When you shoot at high ISO speeds  noise  banding  dots of light  etc    may become noticeable     79    ISO  Changing the ISO Speed      ISO  AUTO     If the ISO speed is set to  AUTO   the  rss actual ISO speed to be set will be  displayed when you press the shutter  100 200 400 800  button halfway  As indicated below  the  ISO speed will be set automatically to  suit the shooting mode     ISO speed    1600 3200 6400                      Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting  GF  G   ta  0 3 58 Automatically set within ISO 100   3200  P Tv Av M 1 A DEP Automatically set within ISO 100   64002  a Fixed at ISO 100  With flash Fixed at ISO 400  34                 1  Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures     2  Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set     3  If fill flash results in overexposure  ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set     4  If bounce flash is used with an external Speedlite in a Basic Zone  except   lt B gt   mode   lt P gt  or  lt A DEP gt  mode  ISO 400   1600
15.     Live View shooting   e Shoot movies  gt  p 141        Movie shooting   Image Quality  e Shoot with image effects  gt  p 81  Selecting a Picture Style   matching the subject  e       Make a large size print of the picture  gt  p 76  AL  aL  QW     pum          a  E D Ah               Take many pictures  gt  p 76  AS1  d S1  S2   3  BR  Focusing   e  Change the point of focus  gt  p 85     AF point selection    e Shoot a moving subject  gt  p 62  84  Al Servo AF    Playback       e  View the images with the camera  gt  p 71  M Playback          Search for pictures quickly  gt  p 202  H Index display   p 203  i Image browsing        e Rate images  gt  p 206  Ratings        e Prevent important images  gt  p 222     Image protect   from accidental deletion       e Delete unnecessary images  gt  p 224  f Delete        e Auto play images and movies   p 215  Slide show          View the images or movies ona TV set  gt  p 218  Video OUT        e Set the LCD monitor brightness  gt  p 167  LCD monitor brightness     Printing    e Print pictures easily  gt  p 235  Direct printing        Index to Features mu    Power Image Quality  e Battery   Image recording quality  gt  p 76  e Charging  gt  p 26 e Picture Style  gt  p 81  e Installing Removing  gt  p 28 e White balance  gt  p 117    Battery check  gt  p 33 e Color space  gt  p 121     Power outlet  gt  p 260 e Image enhancement features  e Auto power off  gt  p 32   Auto Lighting Optimizer  gt  p 109  e Lens peripheral  Card illumi
16.     a ai settings   then press  lt    gt     File numbering Continuous   This menu is displayed only when an  Select folder        STren 1 Eye Fi card has been inserted into  Eye Fi settings the camera    Eye Fi settings Enable the Eye Fi transmission   Eye Fitrans  Disable e Press  lt   gt   set  Eye Fi trans   to    b Enable        Enable   then press  lt   gt    e If you set  Disable   automatic  transmission will not occur even with  the Eye Fi card inserted   Transmission status icon     E    Eye Fi settings Display the connection  Eye Fi trans  Enable information   Connection info  2 L    Select  Connection info    then press     lt    gt         265    Using Eye Fi Cards    Connection info  5 Check the  Access point SSID     pon on ae 7   Check that an access point is  Connection ames Connecting displayed for  Access point SSID     MAC address  00 12 5a 07 4b 9c e You can also check the Eye Fi card   s  Eye Fi firmware Ver     A  2 0001 Oct 6 2008 14 48 37 MAC address and firmware version   mms   Press the  lt MENU gt  button three       times to exit the menu     6 Take the picture    gt  The picture is transferred and the   oT  0  a m PEO    lt     gt  icon switches from gray  Not  mor connected  to one of the icons below      e For transferred images      is  displayed in the shooting information  display  p 226             wa A                 Transmission status icon    D  Gray  Not connected   No connection with access point       Blinking  Connecting   Connectin
17.     e If itis set to  lt MF gt   manual focus      AFi rMF  mp  autofocus will not operate              Remove the front lens cap        Minimizing Dust     When changing lenses  do it in a place with minimal dust      When storing the camera without a lens attached  be sure to attach the  body cap to the camera      Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it     36             Attaching and Detaching a Lens       About Zooming    OT   i  f NNE To zoom  turn the zoom ring on the lens    with your fingers    If you want to zoom  do it before   focusing  Turning the zoom ring after H  achieving focus may throw off the   focus slightly              While pressing the lens release   button  turn the lens as shown by   the arrow      Turn the lens until it stops  then  detach it    e Attach the rear lens cap to the  detached lens        Q e Do not look at the sun directly through any lens  Doing so may cause  loss of vision   e If the front part  focusing ring  of the lens rotates during autofocusing  do  not touch the rotating part        F Image Conversion Factor                            Since the image sensor size is Image sensor size  Approx    smaller than the 35mm film  22 3 x 14 9 mm   0 88 x 0 59 in    format  it will look like the lens 35mm image size   focal length is increased by  36 x 24 mm   1 42 x 0 94 in    approx  1 6x     37    About the Lens Image Stabilizer mx    When you use the IS lens    built in Image Stabilizer  camera shake is  corrected to obtain a
18.     set  3  Flash sync  speed in  Av mode  to  0  Auto   p 252      The camera makes a noise when it is shaken     e  The built in flash   s pop up mechanism moves slightly  This is normal     282    Troubleshooting Guide    The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View  shooting   e If you use flash  the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot   p 125      During Live View and movie shooting  a white  lt  gt  or red   lt  gt  icon is displayed    e It indicates that the camera   s internal temperature is high  If the white   lt  gt  icon is displayed  the still photo   s image quality might  deteriorate  If the red  lt  gt  icon is displayed  it indicates that the Live  View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically  p 139   163      Movie shooting terminates by itself     e Ifthe card   s writing speed is slow  movie shooting may stop  automatically  Use an SD Speed Class 6    CLASS   amp     or faster card  To  find out the card   s read write speed  see the card manufacturer   s Web  site  etc      The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size  reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min  59 sec     The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie  shooting    e Flickering  horizontal stripes  noise   or irregular exposures can be  caused by fluorescent light  LED bulbs  or other artificial lighting during  movie shooting  Also  changes in the exposure  brightness  or color  tone might also be recor
19.    104  F    Working humidity  85  or less  Dimensions  W x H x D   Approx  37 1 x 15 4 x 55 2 mm   1 5 x 0 6 x 2 2 in   Weight  Approx  52 g   1 8 oz     e Battery Charger LC E8 amp   Compatible battery  Battery Pack LP E8    Recharging time  Approx  2 hours  at 23  C 73  F    Rated input  100   240 V AC  50 60 Hz    Rated output  8 4 V DC   720 mA   Working temperature range  6  C   40  C   43  F   104  F   Working humidity  85  or less   Dimensions  W x H x D   Approx  69 x 28 x 87 5 mm   2 7 x 1 1 x 3 4 in   Weight  Approx  82 g   2 9 oz     293    Specifications    e Battery Charger LC E8E  Compatible battery  Battery Pack LP E8    Recharging time  Approx  2 hours  at 23  C 73  F    Rated input  100   240 V AC  50 60 Hz    Rated output  8 4 V DC   720 mA   Working temperature range  6  C   40  C   43  F   104  F   Working humidity  85  or less   Dimensions  W x H x D   Approx  69 x 28 x 87 5 mm   2 7 x 1 1 x 3 4 in   Weight  Approx  82 g   2 9 oz    e EF S 18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS II   Angle of view  Diagonal extent  74  20      27  50       Horizontal extent  64  30      23  20     Vertical extent  45  30      15  40     Lens construction  11 elements in 9 groups  Minimum aperture     22   36  Closest focusing distance  0 25 m   0 82 ft   From image sensor plane   Max  magnification  0 34x  at 55 mm     Field of view  207 x 134   67 x 45 mm  8 1 x 5 3   2 6 x 1 8 in   at 0 25  m   0 82 ft     Image Stabilizer  Lens shift type   Filter size  58 mm   Lens cap  E 58 E 58 II   
20.    B     Quality al  Beep Enable  Release shutter without card  Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct     Peripheral illumin  correct   Attached lens  EF S18 135mm f 3  5 5 6 IS    Correction data available  Correction   Enable   Disable       Select  Peripheral illumin    correct        Under the  A  tab  select   Peripheral illumin  correct    then  press  lt   gt     Select the setting      On the screen  check that   Correction data available  is  displayed for the attached lens    e If  Correction data not available  is  displayed  see    About the Lens  Correction Data    on the next page      Select  Enable   then press  lt     gt      3 Take the picture     e  The image will be recorded with the  corrected peripheral illumination        Correction disabled    110    Correction enabled    MM  Correcting the Image   s Dark Corners  SS Ss Se Se ee    About the Lens Correction Data    The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction  data for approx  25 lenses  In step 2  if you select  Enable   the  peripheral light correction will be applied automatically for any lens  whose correction data has been registered in the camera     With EOS Utility  provided software  p 302   you can check which  lenses have their correction data registered in the camera  You can also  register the correction data for unregistered lenses  For details  see the  PDF Software Instruction Manual  CD ROM  for EOS Utility  p 305      Q e For JPEG images already captu
21.    Example  Car with a highly reflective body  etc    e Near and far subjects covered by an AF point   Example  Animal in a cage  etc      Repetitive patterns   Example  Skyscraper windows  computer keyboards  etc      In such cases  do one of the following     1  With One Shot AF  focus an object at the same distance as the  subject and lock the focus before recomposing  p 53      2  Set the lens focus mode switch to  lt MF gt  and focus manually     Fl For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with  Live mode    Live  mode  during Live View shooting  see page 134     MF  Manual Focusing       1 Set the lens focus mode switch to   lt MF gt      Focus the subject      Focus by turning the lens focusing  ring until the subject looks sharp in  Focusing ring the viewfinder              Fl If you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing  the AF  point achieving focus will light in red briefly  the beeper will sound  and the  focus confirmation light  lt   gt  in the viewfinder will light     87    T   Continuous Shooting   mE    You can shoot up to about 3 7 shots per sec  This is effective for  shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial  expressions                    1 Press the  lt  lt   amp  7  gt  button     Select  lt 81 gt       Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt s  gt  dial to select continuous  shooting  lt i gt   then press  lt   gt      3 Take the picture                    Drive mode  Continuous shooting   Th
22.    FE stands for Flash Exposure     1 Press the  lt  gt  button     gt  The built in flash will rise    e Press the shutter button halfway and  look in the viewfinder to check that  the  lt 4 gt  icon is lit    2 Focus the subject           Spot metering circle 3 Press the  lt    gt  button   616    e Aim the spot metering circle over the  subject  then press the  lt  gt  button     gt  The flash will fire a preflash and the  required flash output is calculated  and retained in memory     gt  In the viewfinder     FEL    is displayed  for a moment and  lt 4  gt  will light    e Each time you press the  lt      gt  button  a  preflash is fired and the required flash output  is calculated and retained in memory    A Take the picture    e  Compose the shot and press the  shutter button completely     gt  The flash is fired when the picture is  taken              Q If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash  the   lt  gt  icon will blink  Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4     108    MEW Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically   mm    If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low  the brightness and  contrast can be corrected automatically  This feature is called Auto  Lighting Optimizer  The default setting is  Standard   With JPEG images   the correction is done when the image is captured  For RAW images  it can  be corrected with Digital Photo Professional  provided software  p 302      1 Select  Auto Lighting Op
23.    Fl While looking at the Live View image  p 124  and holding down the depth of   field preview button  you can change the aperture and see how the depth of  field changes     98    M  Manual Exposure mE    You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired   While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder  you can  set the exposure as desired  This method is called manual exposure       lt M gt  stands for Manual        1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt M gt      Dan  o  Wea 2    M    1 200     F6 3    400       2 Set the ISO speed  p 79         3 Set the shutter speed and     lt  gt    lt A gt     lt  gt  aperture     To set the shutter speed  turn the   lt    gt  dial       To set the aperture  hold down the   lt  Av    gt  button and turn the  lt  gt  dial   Standard exposure index A Focus the subject   Sane Ceara OS   Press the shutter button halfway   Aasi Se a  gt  The exposure setting will be  Exposure level mark displayed in the viewfinder     The exposure level mark  lt f gt  indicates  how far the current exposure level is  from the standard exposure level        5 Set the exposure and take the picture      Set the shutter speed and aperture as desired       f the exposure set exceeds  2 stops from the standard exposure  the  end of the exposure level indicator will display  lt  4 gt  or  lt   gt  in the  viewfinder   On the LCD monitor  if the exposure level exceeds  3 stops   the  lt m gt  icon will blink at where  lt  3 gt  or  lt  3
24.    H    cannot be set        C Fn 3 Flash sync  speed in Av  Aperture priority AE  mode    When you use flash in the aperture priority AE mode  Av   you can set the  flash sync speed     0  Auto  The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1 200 sec  to  30 sec  to suit the scene   s brightness  With an external Speedlite  high   speed sync is also possible    1  1 200 1 60 sec  auto  Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low light conditions  It is  effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake  However  while    the subject will be properly exposed with the flash  the background may  come out dark     252    Custom Function Settings     i   i    2  1 200 sec   fixed     The flash sync speed is fixed to 1 200 sec  This more effectively  prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1  However   the background may come out darker than with setting 1     Q When 1 or 2 is set  high speed sync cannot be used with an external  Speedlite     C Fn Il  Image    C Fn 4 Long exposure noise reduction    0  Off   1  Auto  For 1 sec  or longer exposures  noise reduction is performed  automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected  This  Auto   setting is effective in most cases    2  On  Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec  or longer  The   On  setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or  reduced with the  Auto  setting        Q e With settings 1 and 2  after the picture is taken  the noise 
25.   AL records both a and  L image with a single shot  The  two images are saved to the card simultaneously  The two images will  be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers  file extension   JPG for JPEG and  CR2 for RAW   ML images can be viewed or  printed even with a computer which does not have the software  provided with the camera installed        GW image    0001  CR2  ALimage m  0001  JPG          File number  File extension    Fl Commercially available software might not be able to display RAW images   Using the provided software is recommended     78    ISO  Changing the ISO Speed   memme    Set the ISO speed  image sensor   s sensitivity to light  to suit the  ambient light level  In Basic Zone modes  the ISO speed is set  automatically  p 80            1 Press the  lt ISO gt  button   6    gt   ISO speed  will appear     2 Set the ISO speed     ISO speed  400   Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key or turn the  AUTO 100 200 200  lt    gt  dial to select the desired ISO  1600 3200 6400 speed  then press  lt   gt      e You can also set the ISO speed in the  viewfinder while turning the  lt  7   gt  dial    e With  AUTO  selected  the ISO speed  will be set automatically  p 80         ISO Speed Guide                ISO Speed   Shooting Situation  No flash  Flash Range  100   400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO speed   400   1600 Overcast skies or evening time   the farther the flash range will  1600   6400  H Dark indoors or night extend  p 90                   
26.   Built in flash func  setting      Shutter sync  Ist curtain select  NormalFiring      exp  comp  as ley faa heZ        INFO Clear flash settings    Fl e  Setting  E TTL II meter   to  Evaluative  is recommended    e With  EasyWireless   even if you disable the built in flash from firing  it  will still fire to control the slave unit  Depending on shooting conditions   the flash fired to control the slave unit may appear in the picture       Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit     192    Easy Wireless Flash Shooting  a a E    Fully automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites    You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite   Convenient when you need a large flash output     Built in flash func  setting Basic settings    Built in flash EasyWireless   Flash mode   E TTL Il  E TTL Il meter    Evaluative  Built in flash  EasyWireless    channel Ugh Channel    Same as slave units      INFO Clear flash settings    All the slave units will fire at the same  output and be controlled to obtain a  standard exposure    No matter what the slave ID is  A  B  or  C   all the slave units will fire as one    group        Flash Exposure Compensation    If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright  you can set flash  exposure compensation to adjust the slave units    flash output   Built in flash func  setting    Select  Flash exposure   compensation   then press  lt   gt     e Ifthe flash exposure is too dark    Channel ch press 
27.   File Size   Possible   Maximum  y  megapixels   MB  Shots Burst  AL   High Approx  17 9 6 4 570 34  AL   quality  18M  3 2 1120 1120  4M   Medium Approx  8 0 3 4 1070 1070  aM   quality  8M  1 7 2100 2100  Asi JPEG Approx  4 5 2 2 1670 1670  asi  4 5M  1 1 3180 3180  Low Approx  2 5  S2   quality  2 5M  1 3 2780 2780  Approx  0 35   3  0 35M  0 3 10780 10780  High Approx  17 9 24 5 150 6  G  aL quality  18M  24 5 6 4 110 3                           Figures for the file size  number of possible shots  and maximum burst are based on  Canon   s 4GB test card and testing standards  3 2 aspect ratio  ISO 100  and Standard  Picture Style   These figures will vary depending on the subject  card brand   aspect ratio  ISO speed  Picture Style  Custom Functions  and other settings     76       CEM Setting the Image recording Quality      es 2 i    2 FAQ    e   want to select the image recording quality matching the paper  size for printing   Refer to the diagram on the left when    Paper size choosing the image recording quality  If   A2  42x59 4cm 16 5x23 4in    you want to crop the image  selecting a  A3  42x29 7em  higher quality  more pixels  such as  L   16 5x11 7in   AL  G0  or MM  AL is recommended       2 is suitable for playing the images on a  digital photo frame   3 is suitable for  emailing the image or using it on a Web  site        A4  29 7x21  m 11 7x8 3in    12 7x8 9cm 5 0x3 5in       What   s the difference between 4 and a   It indicates a different image quality due
28.   HDMi  e a a A 210  218  HDMI CEC ij nce tenets 219    High ISO speed noise reduction    254  High Definition  HD     150  210  Highlight alert     Highlight tone priority  Histogram  Brightness RGB  ee 228  IGE SIO tiese 263  Household powe              cccccceee 260           322    ICG profil  ess eraweee ia 121  Image  Auto playback       Auto rotate                  Highlight alert    Histogram  Image characteristics   Picture Style        Index  Jump display   Image browsing     Magnified view     Manual rotate     NO  oaaae  Playback  Protect     Review time          Shooting information   Transfer                View on TV    Image area  Image dust prevention   184  185  187  Image review time               65    166  Image Stabilizer  lens              006 38  Image Zone  Image recording quality  Index display  ISO speed  Auto  ISO expansion      Maximum ISO speed with             ISO Auton yn 80  JREG E TEE EE E E 76  Jump display      0    eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203    Index    Landscape            cccceeseeeteeeeeees 60  82  Language selection    35  Large  Image recording quality       76  LOD MONIO iriiringa  Brightness adjustment  Image playback            e  Menu screen  Screen color  Shooting settings display      20  47  Vari Angle               Image Stabilizer     Lock release  Peripheral illumination  correction  Live View shooting  Aspect ration    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 129  Face detection Live mode                    Grid display  Information display    Live mod
29.   RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE   DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION              300    Software Start Guide    This chapter gives an overview of the software in the  EOS Solution Disk  CD ROM  provided with the camera  and explains how to install the software in a personal  computer  It also explains how to view the pdf files in the  EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk  CD ROM         EOS Solution Disk EOS Software Instruction   Software  Manuals Disk       Software Start Guide          EOS Solution Disk    This disk contains various software for EOS cameras     Communication Software for the Camera and Computer    QO EOS Utility    You can download images  still photos movies  you have shot with the  camera to your computer    You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer   You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera with your computer     You can copy background music tracks  such as EOS Sample Music    to the card       Five original tracks provided by Canon  which you can play as background music during  playback of video snapshot albums  movies  and slide shows on the camera     Image Viewing and Editing Software    Digital Photo Professional    You can view  edit and print shot images on your computer at high   speed    You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged    Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals   It is especially recommended for users
30.   Setting button  p 43            lt  lt  gt  gt  Cross keys  p 43    lt AWB gt  White balance selection button  p 117    lt Vsi  gt  Picture Style selection button  p 81    lt  lt  Gj 7  gt  Drive mode selection button  p 88 89    lt  gt  AF gt  AF mode selection button  p 83     Card slot  p 29        Nomenclature    Shooting Settings Display  in Creative Zone modes  p 22     Shutter speed    Exposure level indicator    Exposure compensation  amount  p 103     AEB range  p 105   Shooting mode E  Picture Style  p 81  P    AF mode  p 83           ONE SHOT  One Shot AF  Al FOCUS  Al Focus AF  Al SERVO  Al Servo AF  MF    Manual Focusing       Quick Control icon  p 41     White balance  p 117   Auto   Daylight   BK Shade      Cloudy          3 White fluorescent light    Flash  a  Custom                   Battery check  p 33           wa   aa   a   Drive mode  p 88 89   O Single shooting     Continuous shooting      Self timer 10 sec Remote control  2 Self timer 2 sec  Wc Self timer Continuous    Eye Fi transmission status    p 265         1  Displayed when the built in flash is popped up      2  Displayed if an Eye Fi card is used        Aperture         Main Dial pointer  p 93    Auto Lighting Optimizer  p 109   ISO speed  p 79    r Highlight tone priority   p 254     Flash exposure  compensation  p 104      m External flash  exposure compensation  L Built in flash   func  setting    p 181           L Image recording quality    p 76   AL Large Fine  aL Large Normal  4M Medium 
31.   WFT Utility    and    Original Data Security Tools    software for the  accessories  sold separately  will also be installed  If not  necessary  uninstall the software     303    Software Start Guide  eee                                      Installing the Software    Compatible OS MAC OS X 10 5   10 6  Intel processor required     1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer     2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk  CD      On your computer   s desktop  double click and open the CD ROM  icon  and then double click  Canon EOS Digital Installer      3 Click  Install  to start installation     Canon EOS DIGITAL  Solution Disk nee         Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation  procedure     When installation ends  the window for Step 4 appears     A  Click  Finish         5 Remove the CD     To download images from the cameras  refer to the EOS Utility  Instruction Manual  PDF electronic manual    e    WFT Utility    software for the accessories  sold separately  will  also be installed  If not necessary  uninstall the software     304    Software Start Guide  ji a SS Se T M R      WINDOWS   EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk    Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your computer        1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk  CD  into the  CD ROM drive of your computer     2 Open the disk     Double click  My Computer  on the desktop and then double click  the CD ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk  
32.   gt  dial    During pause  you can press the  lt  lt   gt  key to view another image    During the slide show  auto power off will not take effect    The display time may vary depending on the image    To view the slide show on a TV set  see pages 218    Upon purchase  the camera is not set for selecting the background   music  You must first use EOS Utility  provided software  to copy the   background music to the card  For details  see the PDF EOS Utility   Instruction Manual on the CD ROM     217    Viewing the Images On TV lu    You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set     Q e Adjust the movie   s sound volume with the TV set  The sound volume  cannot be adjusted with the camera   e Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and  television  turn off the camera and TV set     Depending on the TV set  part of the image displayed might be cut off        Viewing on HD  High Definition  TV Sets  HDMI Cable HTC 100  sold separately  is required     1 Connect the HDMI cable to the  camera   e With the plug   s  lt  a HDMI MINI gt  logo    facing the front of the camera  insert it  into the  lt HDMI OUT  gt  terminal           2 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV  set   e  Connect the HDMI cable to the TV   s  HDMI IN port                 3 Turn on the TV and switch the  TV   s video input to select the  connected port     A Set the camera   s power switch to   lt ON gt      218    Viewing the Images on TV          GTS 5 Press the  lt P  gt  butto
33.   or up to the maximum  limit  will be set automatically     Fl   When  AUTO  is set  the ISO speed is indicated in whole stop  increments  However  the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments   Therefore  in the image   s shooting information  p 226   you may find an  ISO speed like 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed      Inthe  lt  gt  mode  the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used  even if ISO 100 is not displayed     MEN Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for ISO Auto    For ISO Auto  you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400   6400     fa  Under the  Ai  tab  select  ISO Auto    then press  lt   gt   Select the ISO speed   SOM 3 then press  lt    gt         80    Z1  Selecting the Subject   s Optimal Image Characteristics   mm    By selecting a Picture Style  you can obtain image characteristics  matching your photographic expression or the subject   In Basic Zone modes  you cannot select the Picture Style     1 Press the  lt  V 2   gt  button    gt   Picture Style  will appear                             Select a Picture Style   Auto   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the  Kasi Da Ne  lt    gt  dial to select a Picture Style     EN then press  lt   gt      Picture Style       t INFO  Die    Picture Style Characteristics    Auto  The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene  The colors will look  vivid  especially for blue skies  greenery  and sunsets in nature   outdoor  and sunset scenes     Fl If the desired color tone is not obtained
34.   use another Picture Style     Standard  The image looks vivid  sharp  and crisp  This is a general purpose  Picture Style suitable for most scenes    Portrait  For nice skin tones  The image looks softer  Good for close up  portraits   By changing the  Color tone   p 113   you can adjust the skin tone     81    32  Selecting the Subject   s Optimal Image Characteristics      ERL  Landscape  For vivid blues and greens  and very sharp and crisp images   Effective for impressive landscapes     EN Neutral  This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  their computer  For natural colors and subdued images     EF  Faithful   This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  their computer  When the subject is captured under a color  temperature of 5200K  the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match  the subject   s color  The image looks dull and subdued     Monochrome  Creates black and white images        Q Other than with GW   the black and white image cannot be reverted to  color  If you want to later shoot pictures in color  make sure the   Monochrome  setting has been canceled  When  Monochrome  is  set   lt B W gt  will appear in the viewfinder     User Def  1 3  You can register a basic style such as  Portrait    Landscape   a  Picture Style file  etc   and adjust it as desired  p 115   Any User  Defined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same  default settings as the  Auto  Picture Style     82    AF  Changing the 
35.  12  fas115 102 0027 e Press the  lt P  gt  button   a   Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key to select an  Aiae sdl album  then press  lt   gt      Movies shot as a video snapshot will have an   lt g gt  icon on the screen   s upper left           Fl   Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private  enjoyment  Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder      To play background music  you must first copy the background music from  the EOS Solution Disk  provided  to the card  For the copying procedure   see the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD ROM    Provided Software Usable with Albums      EOS Utility  By copying background music to the card  you can play   background music together with the playback of albums  normal movies   and slide shows on the camera      ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser  The edition of albums is possible     156    mN Menu Function Settings m     The menu options displayed under the  Chas    Gms   and  Ohm  tabs  are explained below      Gm  tab  Bl    Movie exposure Auto  AF mode Live mode    AF w  shutter button during        mShutter AE lock button  Remote control Disable          Highlight tone priority         Movie exposure  Normally  set this to  Auto    Setting it to  Manual  enables you to manually set the ISO speed   shutter speed  and aperture for movie shooting  p 144      e AF mode  The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 131 137   You can select  Live mode        Live mode   or  Quick mode   Note  that co
36.  A  BKT   then press  lt    gt     Custom White Balance  gt  The WB correction WB bracketing    WB Shift BKT 0 0 0 screen will appear     Color space sRGB  Picture Style                2 Set the white balance correction    e Press the  lt  lt  gt  key to move the    m     mark to the desired position    e Bis for blue  Ais amber  M is  magenta  and G is green  The color in  the respective direction will be  corrected      On the upper right     Shift    indicates   io the direction and correction amount   G1 e Pressing the  lt INFO  gt  button will  Bracket cancel all the  WB Shift BKT     20 settings      gt  Shift  INFO   ella     Bracket SET OK e Press  lt   gt  to exit the setting and  return to the menu                          Fl e During the white balance correction   lt  W8  gt  will be displayed in the  viewfinder and on the LCD monitor     One level of the blue amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color  temperature conversion filter   Mired  Measuring unit indicating the  density of a color temperature conversion filter      119    WB Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source         White Balance Auto Bracketing    With just one shot  three images having a different color balance can be  recorded simultaneously  Based on the color temperature of the current white  balance setting  the image will be bracketed with a blue amber bias or  magenta green bias  This is called white balance bracketing  WB BKT   White  balance bracketing is possible up to  3
37.  Adobe RGB              AF  Focusing      AF point  Al FOCUS  AI Focus AF     Al SERVO  Al Servo AF     Al Servo AF         Aperture priority AE  Aspect ratio    eeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeees  Audio video OUT     Auto Lighting Optimizer       Auto playback  Auto power off                          Auto reset  Auto rotate of vertical images         174  AULOfO CUS  renan enna 83  85       320    Background music  Basic Zone modes       Bass boost          Battery check  Battery Grip  B  eperiei iso ivoreceecei   Black and white image      65  82  114  Bracketing             cceceeeeeee 105  120  Brightness  exposure              0 103  Adjust   exposure compensation           103  Auto exposure bracketing   AEB   sinear 105  252    Autoexposure lock  AE lock      107   Measurement method    Metering mode       Built in flash    BULB  Bulb exposure                  100        Creative Auto              Cable    3  218  221  236  277  Camera  Camera shake             ee 122  Clear camera settings               176  Holding the camera           0  08 39  Settings display   175        Card reminder      Eye Fi      Format     Problem       SD speed class  SDHC SDXC     Write protect  Center weighted average  metering  aspran iaa 102  CRarQer  rrii niei 24  26    Cleaning  Image sensor         184  187  Clear camera settings   Close ups  Color space    color reproduction range               121    Color temperature     Color tone  Continuous  Continuous shooting  Contrast  Copyright informa
38.  E8E   Connect the power cord to the    charger and insert the plug into the  power outlet               gt  Recharging starts automatically and  the charge lamp turns orange     gt  When the battery is fully recharged   the full charge lamp will turn green                   It takes approx  2 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted  battery at 23  C   73  F  The time required to recharge the battery  depends on the ambient temperature and the battery   s charge level    e For safety reasons  recharging in low temperatures  6  C   10  C    43  F   50  F  will take a longer time  up to 4 hours      26    Charging the Battery    yt    3g Tips for Using the Battery and Charger    Upon purchase  the battery is not fully charged   Recharge the battery before using     Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be  used    Even during storage  a charged battery will gradually drain and lose  its power     After recharging the battery  detach it and unplug the charger  from the power outlet     When not using the camera  remove the battery    If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period  a small  amount of power current is released  resulting in excess discharge  and shorter battery life  Store the battery with the protective cover   provided  attached  Storing the battery after it is fully charged can  lower the battery   s performance     The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries    The battery charger is compatible with a 1
39.  Focus the subject    e Aim the AF point over the subject and  press the shutter button halfway     gt  The Live View image will turn off  the  reflex mirror will go back down  and  AF will be executed     gt  When focus is achieved  the AF point  which achieved focus will turn green  and the Live View image will  reappear     gt  If focus is not achieved  the AF point   125 56 3249123   514   400 will turn orange and blink           4 Take the picture  F    Check the focus and exposure  then  press the shutter button completely to  take the picture  p 124         i  125 56 2248423   514   D400    Fl You cannot take a picture during autofocusing  Take the picture while the  Live View image is displayed     137    MF  Focusing Manually mem    You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually        1 Set the lens focus mode switch to   lt MF gt     e Turn the lens focusing ring to focus  roughly               Move the magnifying frame      Press the  lt  lt  gt  key to move the  magnifying frame to the position  where you want to focus    e To return the magnifying frame to the  center  press the  lt   gt  or  lt  gt   button              Magnify the image      Press the  lt Q  gt  button     gt  The area within the magnifying frame  will be magnified      Each time you press the  lt Q  gt  button   the view will change as follows              Ea 5x     10x     gt  Normal view                4 Focus manually      While looking at the magnified image   turn the lens focusi
40.  If the camera   s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder  image  using Dioptric Adjustment Lens E  10 types  sold separately  is  recommended     Holding the Camera    To obtain sharp images  hold the camera still to minimize camera  shake                 Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting    1  Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly    2  Hold the lens bottom with your left hand    3  Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand   s index finger    4  Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body    5  To maintain a stable stance  place one foot in front of the other    6  Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder     Fl To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor  see page 123   39    Basic Operation       Shutter Button    The shutter button has two steps  You can press the shutter button  halfway  Then you can further press the shutter button completely           Pressing halfway   This activates autofocusing and the  automatic exposure system that sets the  shutter speed and aperture    The exposure setting  shutter speed and  aperture  is displayed in the viewfinder   4     While you press the shutter button  halfway  the LCD monitor will turn off   p 179      Pressing completely  This releases the shutter and takes the  picture                 Preventing Camera Shake   Hand held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called  camera shake  It can cause blurred pictures  To
41.  Select your language and operating system  The index of the  Instruction Manuals is displayed   Q Acrobat Reader  version 6 0 or later  must be installed to view the Instruction Manual  files  PDF format   Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your computer     To save the PDF manual to your computer  use the    Save    function of your Adobe  Reader      MACINTOSH   EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk    Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your Macintosh        1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk  CD  into the  CD ROM drive of your Macintosh     2 Open the disk     Double click on the disk icon     3 Double click the START html file   Select your language and operating system  The index of the  Instruction Manuals is displayed   Q Acrobat Reader  version 6 0 or later  must be installed to view the Instruction Manual  files  PDF format   Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your Macintosh     To save the PDF manual to your computer  use the    Save    function of your Adobe o  Reader     305    306    Quick Reference Guide and  Instruction Manual Index    Menu Operations                           p 308  Image recording Quality                                 p 309  34  Picture Style                                 p 309   Q  Quick Control Screen                               p 310  Nomenclature                          p 311  Basic Zone Modes                          p 313   4 Using the Built in Flash 
42.  Set the lens focus mode switch  to  lt AF gt     e Press the  lt    AF gt  button      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt s   gt  dial to select the AF  mode  then press  lt   gt      AF mode ae SHET ee AF    or still subjects  Shot A   ra nea Al FOCUS AI Focus AF    Switches the AF mode  automatically  Al SERVO AI Servo AF         AF Point x For moving subjects    Bs S    Press the  lt   gt  button       Press the  lt   lt  gt  key to select the  AF point selection AF point    Manual selection   While looking through the  viewfinder  you can select the  AF point by turning the  lt s   gt   dial until the desired AF point  flashes in red      Pressing  lt  gt  toggles the AF                         a point selection between the  a AA    center AF point and automatic  a o AF point selection     315    Quick Reference Guide       ISO  ISO Speed        Press the  lt ISO gt  button      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt  2   gt  dial to select the ISO  speed  then press  lt   gt       When  AUTO  is selected  the  ISO speed is set automatically   When you press the shutter  button halfway  the ISO speed  setting will be displayed           ISO speed  400    AUTO 100 200 800    1600 3200 6400           Drive Mode         Press the  lt  lt         gt  button      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt  gt  dial to select the drive  mode  then press  lt   gt     O   Single shooting       Continuous shooting  Drive mode F     Self timer 10 sec Remote  Cont
43.  Use a plain blower without any brush attached  A brush can scratch the  sensor    e  Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount  If  the power is turned off  the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or  reflex mirror might get damaged    e  Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor  The blowing force can  damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor      If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor  the beeper  will sound as a warning  Stop cleaning the sensor    e  f a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains  having the  sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended     188    Wireless Flash  Photography       You can use the built in flash  for wireless flash shooting        The camera   s built in flash can work as a master unit  with Canon Speedlites having a wireless slave feature  and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite s  to fire     Canceling the slave unit   s auto power off    To cancel the slave unit   s auto power off  press the  camera   s  lt  gt  button  If you are using manual flash  firing  press the slave unit   s test firing  PILOT  button to  cancel the auto power off     Fl Be sure to also read the explanations about wireless flash  photography in the Speedlite   s instruction manual        Using Wireless Flash    mE    Slave Unit Settings and Position    Regarding your Speedlite  slave unit   refer to its instruction manual and  set it as follows  The settings other 
44.  User Def  1 5 Select a parameter     ile pandscape e Select a parameter such as  canes  Sharpness   then press  lt   gt       amp Saturation  Color tone    Detail set  BT  User Def  1 6 Set the parameter   Pict  re Styie kandscape e Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to adjust the    sh ae  OSharoness parameter as desired  then press   lt   gt      For details  see    Customizing Image  Characteristics    on pages 112 114          Press the  lt MENU gt  button to register    Picture Style  User Def 1 TREE the modified Picture Style  The  06008000 Picture Style selection screen will  then reappear   E  gt  The base Picture Style will be   9 Detail set  indicated on the right of  User Def            Q e  f a Picture Style has already been registered under  User Def       changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter  settings of the registered Picture Style        f you execute  Clear all camera settings   p 176   all the  User Def      settings will revert to the default  Any Picture Style registered via EOS  Utility  provided software  will have only its modified parameters reverted  to the default setting     F To shoot with a registered Picture Style  follow step 2 on page 81 to select   User Def     and then shoot     116    WB  Matching the Light Source   mum    The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in  the picture is called white balance  WB   Normally  the  lt  MB  gt   Auto   setting will obtain the correct white bal
45.  WB bracketing  p 120    44 Enable    Disable Live View shooting  p 123       30 sec     nb _ Red eye reduction  p 91          Enable     Auto rotate display  p 174  A    28 02 2011 13 30 00                Date Time  p 34   Beeper  p 166        Auto power off  p 167        Sensor cleaning  p 184     175    Handy Features    Sa 8 2 Se SS _    MM Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings      The camera   s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to  the default  This option is available in Creative Zone modes     1 Select  Clear settings      Custom Functions C Fn    Under the       tab  select  Clear  Copyright information  Clear settings  Firmware Ver  1 0 0    settings   then press  lt   gt      ne Select  Clear all camera settings    Clear all camera settings e Select  Clear all camera settings    Clear all Custom Func   C Fn   Cancel then press  lt    gt         Clear all camera settings 3 Select  OK       Select  OK   then press  lt   gt      gt  Setting  Clear all camera settings   will reset the camera to the default  settings on the next page     Clear all camera settings       Cancel   OK      2 FAQ       Clearing all camera settings   After the procedure above  select  Clear all Custom Func   C Fn    in      Clear settings  to clear all the Custom Function settings   p 250      176    Handy Features                                                          Shooting Settings Image recording Settings  AF mode One Shot AF Quality 4L  AF point selection   
46.  Zone modes    Quick mode e Select the desired AF mode  then  press  lt   gt           While the Live View image is  displayed  you can press the  lt  Q  gt  E  button to select the AF mode on the  Quick Control screen  p 128      Live Mode  Ai    The image sensor is used to focus  Although AF is possible with the  Live View image displayed  the AF operation will take longer than  with the Quick mode  Also  achieving focus may be more difficult than  with the Quick mode        1 Display the Live View image     e Press the  lt B gt  button    gt  The Live View image will appear on  the LCD monitor    gt  The AF point  lt    gt  will appear     TIME  ota  o ea 2 Move the AF point   AF point e Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to move the AF  point to where you want to focus  it  cannot go to the edges of the picture    e To return the AF point to the center   press the  lt   gt  or  lt  f gt  button                    131    Changing the Autofocus Mode          Focus the subject    e  Aim the AF point over the subject and  press the shutter button halfway     gt  When focus is achieved  the AF point  will turn green and the beeper will  sound     gt  If focus is not achieved  the AF point  will turn orange     AF A Take the picture   V4   Check the focus and exposure  then    press the shutter button completely to  take the picture  p 124                125 56 3218123    514   D400        Face detection  Live Mode  AF       With the same AF method as the Live mode  human faces are
47.  aL  76   Beep Enable   Disable 166   peleas o SnuNer Enable   Disable 166   without card   Image review Off   2 sec    4 sec    8 sec    Hold 166   Peripheral illumination Enable   Disable 110   correction   Red eye reduction Disable   Enable 91       Flash firing   E TTL II metering mode    Built in flash function setting   External flash                                                                                        piachicontrol function setting   External flash C Fn setting   180  Clear external flash C Fn setting     Shooting 2  Red    Exposure 1 3 stop or 1 2 stop increments   5 stops 105   compensation AEB   AEB   2 stops    Auto Lighting Optimizer   Disable   Low   Standard   Strong 109   S  Evaluative metering      Partial metering     Metering mode CJ Spot metering   CJ Center weighted 102  average metering   Custom White Balance   Manual setting of white balance 117   p WB correction  White balance correction 119   WB Shif BKT BKT setting  White balance bracketing 120   Color space sRGB   Adobe RGB 121  33A  Auto    2 55  Standard    22 P  Portrait   81   Picture Style 2L  Landscape   E N Neutral   E 2F  Faithful   112   22M  Monochrome   E21  User Def  1  2  3 115                                     F    The  Q  Shooting 2   A    Shooting 3        Set up 3  and  Xx  My Menu  screens  tabs  are not displayed in Basic Zone modes     The  Ai  Shooting 4 tab is displayed in Basic Zone modes as the  Gi   Shooting 2 tab   e  Shaded menu options are not displayed
48.  an underscore    _     There can be no space in  the folder name  Also  folder names cannot have the same three digit number  such as    100ABC_D    and    100W_XYZ    even if the letters are different     169    Handy Features    E Se a  ___        M File Numbering Methods    The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the  images are taken  then saved in a folder  You can change how the file  number is assigned    The file number will appear on your computer in this format   IMG_0001 JPG     Under the       tab  select  File  numbering   then press  lt  gt   The  available settings are described below     File numbering _   Continuous Select one  then press  lt   gt    uto reset  Manual reset       e   Continuous   The file numbering continues in sequence even  after you replace the card or create a folder   Even after you replace the card or create a new folder  the file  numbering continues in sequence up to 9999  This is convenient  when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001  to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal  computer   If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images  recorded previously  the file numbering of the new images might  continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or  folder  If you want to use continuous file numbering  you should use  a newly formatted card each time    File numbering after File numbering after  replacing the card creating a 
49.  audio output  For personal computer communication and direct printing   Hi Speed USB equivalent    HDMI mini OUT terminal  Type C  Auto switching of resolution   CEC compatible   External microphone   IN terminal  3 5mm dia  stereo mini jack   Remote control terminal  For Remote Switch RS 60E3   Wireless remote control  Remote Controller RC 6   Eye Fi card  Compatible    292    Specifications    e Power  Battery  Battery Pack LP E8  Quantity 1     AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK E8    With Battery Grip BG E8 attached  size AA LR6  batteries can be used  Battery life  With viewfinder shooting    Based on CIPA Approx  440 shots at 23  C 73  F  approx  400 shots at 0  C 32  F  testing standards  With Live View shooting     Approx  180 shots at 23  C 73  F  approx  150 shots at 0  C 32  F  Movie shooting time Approx  1 hr  40 min  at 23  C 73  F   Approx  1 hr  20 min  at 0  C 32  F    With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8     e Dimensions and Weight   Dimensions  W x H x D   Approx  133 1 x 99 5 x 79 7 mm   5 2 x 3 9 x 3 1 in    Weight  Approx  570 g   20 1 oz   CIPA Guidelines    Approx  515 g   18 2 oz   Body only     e Operation Environment  Working temperature range  0  C   40  C   32  F   104  F    Working humidity  85  or less   e Battery Pack LP E8   Type  Rechargeable lithium ion battery  Rated voltage  7 2VDC   Battery capacity  1120 mAh    Working temperature range  During charging  6  C   40  C   43  F   104  F  During shooting  0  C   40  C   32  F
50.  can imprint the date and time in the  picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information   p 241            is displayed     Ifthe card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera  can display        will be displayed  p 207     Eye Fi settings  does not appear     e  Eye Fi settings  will appear only when an Eye Fi card is inserted into  the camera  If the Eye Fi card has a write protect tab set to the LOCK  position  you will not be able to check the card   s connection status or  disable Eye Fi card transmission  p 265      Printing Related Problems    There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction  manual     e What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer  This  instruction manual lists all the printing effects available  p 240      286    Error Codes memm    Error No  If there is a problem with the camera  an  error message will appear  Follow the on   x screen instructions   Err 01    Communications between    the camera and lens is  faulty   Clean the lens contacts        Countermeasures       No  Error Message  amp  Solution       Communications between the camera and lens is faulty  Clean the  lens contacts           01   gt  Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens and use a  Canon lens  p 15  18    Card cannot be accessed  Reinsert change card or format card  m with camera         gt  Remove and insert the card again  replace the card  or format the  card  p 29  45      Cannot save i
51.  detected  and focused  Have the target person face the camera     1 Display the Live View image        Press the  lt  gt  button     gt  The Live View image will appear on  the LCD monitor      When a face is detected  the  lt   1 gt   frame will appear over the face to be  focused    e If multiple faces are detected   lt     gt  gt   will be displayed  Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt   key to move the  lt  lt     gt  frame over  the desired target face        132    Changing the Autofocus Mode          2 Focus the subject    e  Press the shutter button halfway and  the camera will focus the face  covered by the  lt   1 gt  frame     gt  When focus is achieved  the AF point          will turn green and the beeper will  sound     gt  If focus is not achieved  the AF point  will turn orange       Ifa face cannot be detected  the AF  point  lt    gt  will be displayed and AF  will be executed at the center    3 Take the picture      Check the focus and exposure  then  press the shutter button completely to  take the picture  p 124                  m6  DE  56ga   514  E100       If the focus is way off  face detection will not be possible  If the lens  enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to   lt  AF  gt   turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus  The face will then be  detected and  lt 1 1 gt  will be displayed    An object other than a human face might be detected as a face    Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the 
52.  gt  is displayed      Q e  f     Auto Lighting Optimizer   p 109  is set to any setting other than   Disable   the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has  been set    e  f ISO Auto is set  the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter  speed and aperture to obtain a standard exposure  Therefore  you may  not obtain the desired exposure effect     99    M  Manual Exposure       4 Using the Built in Flash    To obtain a correct flash exposure  the flash output will be set  automatically  autoflash exposure  to match the manually set aperture   The flash sync speed can be set from 1 200 sec  to 30 sec  and bulb     BULB  Bulb Exposures    A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open  for as long as you hold down the shutter  button  It can be used to photograph  fireworks  etc    In step 2 on the preceding page  turn the   lt  gt  dial to the left to set  lt BULB gt    The elapsed exposure time will be  displayed on the LCD monitor        Q   During the bulb exposure  do not point the lens toward the sun  The  sun   s heat can damage the camera   s internal components      Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual  the image might  look a little grainy      You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting  4  Long exp   noise reduction  to  1  Auto  or  2  On  in the      Custom Functions   C Fn    p 253        If ISO Auto is set for bulb exposures  the ISO speed will be fixed at ISO  400  p 80      F e For bulb exposures  using a tripod a
53.  image     Use the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to scroll around the  magnified image     To exit the magnified display  press  the  lt     gt  button and the single image  display will return           Fl e You can turn the  lt g  lt   gt  dial to view another image while the  magnification is maintained     The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately  after shooting   e A movie cannot be magnified     204     3  Rotating the Image mum    You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation     Fl 1 Select  Rotate    Protect images   Under the   1   tab  select  Rotate      Rotate  Erase images then press  lt   gt      Print order  Creative filters    Resize    2 Select an image     Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select the  image to be rotated   e You can also select an image on the  index display  p 202         3 Rotate the image    e Each time you press  lt   gt   the  image will rotate clockwise as follows   90       270    gt  0     e  To rotate another image  repeat steps  2 and 3       To exit and return to the menu  press o  the  lt MENU gt  button        Fl   If you have set       Auto rotate  to  Onis      p 174  before taking  vertical shots  you need not rotate the image as described above     Ifthe rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during  image playback  set       Auto rotate  to  On 6       e A movie cannot be rotated     205    M4 Setting Ratings m     You can rate images and movies with one of five rating mar
54.  in Basic Zone modes     270    TEN Menu Settings   f  ce i ee i          G Shooting 3  Red  Page  Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 185  ISO Auto Max   400   Max   800   Max   1600   80    Max   3200   Max   6400       Gai Shooting 4  Red                                                        Live View shooting Enable   Disable 125  AF mode Live mode   X Live mode   Quick mode 131  Grid display Off   Grid 1   Grid 2 129  Aspect ratio 3 2   4 3   16 9   1 1 129  Metering timer Err 16 sec    30 sec    1 min    10 min    130       2  Playback 1  Blue        Select images   All images in folder   Unprotect  Protect images all images in folder   All images on card   222  Unprotect all images on card       Rotate Rotate vertical images 205       Select and erase images   All images in folder    All images on card    Print order Specify images to be printed  DPOF  245  Grainy B W   Soft focus   Fish eye effect      Erase images 224                                  Greative filters Toy camera effect   Miniature effect 230  Resize Downsize the image   s pixel count 233  z  Playback 2  Blue    Histogram Brightness   RGB 228   2 1 image   10 images   100 images   Date    Image jump w  lt  Folder   Movies   Stills   Rating 203  Slide show Playback description   Display time   Repeat   25  Transition effect   Background music   Rating  OFF   C   G4  01 0   EI 206  Bass boost Disable   Enable 213  Control over HDMI Disable   Enable 219                   271    O
55.  instruction manual     181     EW  Setting the Flash   i SN SS Ss    e Shutter sync   Normally  set this to  1st curtain  so that the flash fires immediately  after the exposure starts   If  2nd curtain  is set  the flash will fire right before the exposure  ends  When this is combined with a slow sync speed  you can create  a trail of light such as from car headlights at night  With 2nd curtain  sync  a preflash is fired when you press the shutter button  completely  This is to determine the exposure  Then immediately  before the exposure ends  the real flash is fired  Therefore  two  flashes will be fired  However  with shutter speeds faster than 1 30  sec   1st curtain sync will automatically take effect   If an external Speedlite is attached  you can also set  Hi speed    4p   For details  see the Speedlite   s instruction manual     e Wireless flash  See    Wireless Flash Photography    on page 189     e Flash exposure compensation  See    B Flash Exposure Compensation    on page 104     e Flash mode  You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting     Built in flash func  setting    E TTL Il  is the standard mode of  EX series Speedlites for automatic  Flash mode bE TTL Il flash shooting     Manual flash    e  Manual flash  is for advanced users    who want to set the  Flash output    1 1 to 1 128  themselves    e Regarding other flash modes  refer to  your Speedlite   s instruction manual      INFO KAET ORe o    External flash func  setting    Flash 
56.  levels in single level increments        Set the white balance bracketing amount      In step 2 for white balance correction   when you turn the  lt   gt  dial  the    m     mark on the screen will change to    m          3 points   Turning the dial to the right sets  the B A bracketing  and turning it to the  left sets the M G bracketing     gt  On the right     Bracket    indicates the  bracketing direction and correction amount      Pressing the  lt INFO  gt  button will cancel    TE all the  WB Shift BKT  settings         M  shift CHA Clear all   Press  lt   gt  to exit the setting and   4 Bracket   SET KOLS  return to the menu              Bracketing Sequence   The images will be bracketed in the following sequence  1  Standard  white balance  2  Blue  B  bias  and 3  Amber  A  bias  or 1  Standard  white balance  2  Magenta  M  bias  and 3  Green  G  bias     Q During WB bracketing  the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and  the number of possible shots will also decrease to one third the normal number     F e  You can also set white balance correction and AEB  p 105  together with  white balance bracketing  If you set AEB in combination with white balance  bracketing  a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot      Since three images are recorded for one shot  the card will take longer to  record the shot   e    BKT    stands for Bracketing     120    MEW Setting the Color Reproduction Range   m    The range of reproducible colors is c
57.  like a high output flash attached externally in place of the  built in flash    For detailed instructions  see the EX series Speedlite   s instruction  manual  This camera is a Type A camera that can use all the features  of EX series Speedlites     Be sess    Shoe mount Speedlites Macro Lites       F e With an EX series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings   p 181   only  4 exp  comp  and  E TTL II meter   can be set for   External flash func  setting    Certain EX series Speedlites also  enable  Shutter sync   to be set       If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite  the  flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera   s LCD  monitor will change from to 7      If the Speedlite   s Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to  TTL autoflash  the flash will fire at full output only     263    External Speedlites    Canon Speedlites other than the EX series    e With an EZ E EG ML TL series Speedlite set in TTL or A TTL  autoflash mode  the flash can be fired at full output only   Set the camera   s shooting mode to  lt M gt   manual exposure  or   lt  Av  gt   aperture priority AE  and adjust the aperture setting before  shooting    e  f you are using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode  shoot in  the manual flash mode     Using Non Canon Flash Units    Sync Speed   The camera can synchronize with compact  non Canon flash units at  1 200 sec  or slower shutter speeds  Use a sync speed slower than  1 200 sec    Be
58.  mm   E 67U E 67 Il   Approx  75 4 x 101 mm  3 0 x 4 0 in   Approx  455 g   16 0 oz    EW 73B  sold separately    LP1116  sold separately     e EF S 55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS II    Angle of view     Lens construction   Minimum aperture   Closest focusing distance   Max  magnification   Field of view     Image Stabilizer    Filter size    Lens cap    Max  diameter x length   Weight    Hood    Case     Diagonal extent  27  50      6  15     Horizontal extent  23  20      5  20      Vertical extent  15  40      3  30      12 elements in 10 groups      22   32   1 1 m 3 6 ft   From image sensor plane   0 31 x  at 250 mm    328 x 218   73 x 49 mm   12 9 x 8 6   2 9 x 1 9 in    at 1 1 m 3 6 ft     Lens shift type   58 mm   E 58 E 58 II   Approx  70 x 108 mm   2 8 x 4 3 in   Approx  390 g   13 8 oz    ET 60  sold separately    LP1019  sold separately     295    e All the data above is based on Canon   s testing standards and CIPA  Camera  amp   Imaging Products Association  testing standards and guidelines      Dimensions  maximum diameter  length and weight listed above are based on  CIPA Guidelines  except weight for camera body only     e Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice       Ifa problem occurs with a non Canon lens attached to the camera  consult the  respective lens maker     About MPEG 4 Licensing     This product is licensed under AT amp T patents for the MPEG 4 standard and may be  used for encoding MPEG 4 compliant video and or decodin
59.  of the sensor  Normally  you need not pay attention to this  operation  However  you can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as  well as disable it     Cleaning the Sensor Now    1 Select  Sensor cleaning    LCD brightness Peete   Under the       tab  select  Sensor  LCD off on btn Shutter btn     Date Time 28 02  11 13 30 cleaning   then press  lt    gt    Language  English  Video system PAL    Sensor cleaning    Feature guide Enable       Sensor cleaning Select  Clean now to      Auto cleaning    cr Enable e  Select  Clean now         then press     Gs  Clean manually S  i      Select  OK  on the dialog screen   then press  lt     gt      gt  The screen will indicate that the  sensor is being cleaned  Although  there will be a shutter sound  a  picture is not taken        F e For best results  do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is  placed on a table or other flat surface   e Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning  the result will not improve that  much  Right after the sensor cleaning is finished  the  Clean now    4    option will remain disabled temporarily     Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning    e In step 2  select  Auto cleaning    4   and set it to  Disable     gt  The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the  power switch to  lt ON gt  or  lt OFF gt      184    m Appending Dust Delete Data  mum    Normally  the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust  that might be visible on captured images  However  in case vis
60.  on the TV  screen and you can use the TV   s  remote control to playback images     Select an image or movie      Point the remote control toward the  TV set and press the    gt  button to  select an image     Still photo playback menu Press the remote control   s Enter   TENE    button    Movie playback menu  gt  The menu appears and you can do  pay the playback operations shown on the    EIE er    4    Return   Press the        button to select the  326  9 image index desired option  then press the Enter          Play movie button  For a slide show  press the       Slide show remote control   s T 1 button to select  INFO    Disp  shooting info an option  then press the Enter        Rotate button     e  f you select  Return  and press the  Enter button  the menu will disappear  and you can use the     button to  select an image     Fl   Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection  For  details  see the TV set   s instruction manual     Certain TV sets  even those compatible with HDMI CEC  may not  operate properly  In such a case  disconnect the HDMI cable  set  2  Ctrl over HDMI  to  Disable   and use the camera to control the  playback operation     220    Viewing the Images on TV       Viewing on Non HD  High Definition  TV Sets    SY AZ Connect the provided AV cable to  N Se 1 the camera   Ede    e With the plug   s  lt Canon gt  logo facing    on  rer       the back of the camera  insert it into  the  lt  A V OUT gt  terminal        cA          Con
61.  one for one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an   authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment    EEE  and batteries and accumulators  Improper handling of this type of waste   could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to   potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE    Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the   effective usage of natural resources    For more information about the recycling of this product  please contact your   local city office  waste authority  approved scheme or your household waste   disposal service or visit   www canon europe com environment     EEA  Norway  Iceland and Liechtenstein           Trademarks   e Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated    e  Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  United States and other countries    e  Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc   in the United States and other countries      SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C  LLC    e  HDMI  HDMI logo  and High Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or  registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC    e All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this  manual are the property of their respective owners     299       IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS   1  SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS     This manual contains important safety  and
62.  operating instructions for Battery Charger LC E8  amp  LC E8E    2  Before using the charger  read all instructions and cautionary remarks on   1  the charger   2  the battery pack  and  3  the product using the battery    pack   CAUTION     To reduce risk of injury  charge only the Battery Pack LP E8     3   Other types of batteries may burst  causing personal injury and other  damage    4  Do not expose the charger to rain or snow    5  Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in  fire  electric shock  or personal injury    6  To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord  pull by plug rather than  by cord when disconnecting charger    7  Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on  tripped over  or  otherwise subjected to damage or stress    8  Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug   replace them  immediately    9  Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow  been dropped     or otherwise damaged in any way  take it to a qualified serviceman    10  Do not disassemble the charger  take it to a qualified serviceman when  service or repair is required  Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of  electric shock or fire    11  To reduce risk of electric shock  unplug charger from outlet before  attempting any maintenance or cleaning     MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION  Unless otherwise stated in this manual  there are no user serviceable parts  inside  Refer servicing to qualified serviceman           CAUTION
63.  or  lt B gt     Display the Live View image    e With the Live View image displayed   you can see the ambience effect    e  Press the  lt B gt  button to switch to  Live View shooting     On the Quick Control screen    select the desired ambience    e Press the  lt  Q  gt  button  610     e Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select   Standard setting    Shoot by  ambience selection  will appear on  the screen   s bottom      Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key or turn the  lt s   gt   dial to select the desired ambience     gt  The LCD monitor will show how the image  will look with the selected ambience     Default setting  Shoot by ambience selection       65    Shoot by Ambience Selection       Default setting ii  Effect Standard    A Set the ambience effect     Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the  effect bar so that  Effect  appears at  the bottom    Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt s   gt  dial to select the desired  effect     5 Take the picture     To shoot while the Live View image is  displayed  press the shutter button   To return to viewfinder shooting   press the  lt   g gt  button to exit Live  View shooting  Then press the shutter  button completely to take the picture   If you change the shooting mode or  set the power switch to  lt OFF gt   the  setting will revert back to  Standard  setting      Q   The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not  look exactly the same as the actual photo   e Using flash may minimize the ambience 
64.  picture  too bright or too dark  titled horizontally or diagonally  or partially  hidden    The  lt   1 gt  focusing frame might cover only part of the face     When you press the  lt   gt  or  lt    gt  button  the AF mode will switch to the  Live mode  p 131   You can press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to move the AF point   Press the  lt   gt  or  lt  j gt  button again to return to the X  face detection   Live mode    Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the  picture  the  lt   1 gt  will be grayed out  Then if you press the shutter button  halfway  the center AF point  lt    gt  will be used to focus     133    Changing the Autofocus Mode   ae eS S     Live Mode and  X  Face Detection  Live Mode Notes    AF operation     Focusing will take slightly longer      Even when focus has been achieved  pressing the shutter button  halfway will focus again      The image brightness may change during and after the AF  operation    e Ifthe light source changes while the Live View image is displayed   the screen might flicker and focusing may be difficult  If this  happens  stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the  actual light source first      If you press the  lt  gt  button in the Live mode  the image will be  magnified at the AF point  If focusing is difficult in the magnified view   return to the normal view and autofocus  Note that the AF speed  may differ between the normal and magnified views    e If you autofocus in the Live mode   s norma
65.  prevent camera shake   note the following       Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page   e Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus  then slowly press the  shutter button completely     F e  f you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first  or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely  immediately  the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture      Even during the menu display  image playback  and image recording   you can instantly go back to shooting ready by pressing the shutter  button halfway     40     Q  Quick Control for Shooting Functions mm  You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the  LCD monitor  This is called the Quick Control screen     1 Press the  lt  Q  gt  button    gt  The Quick Control screen will appear     810               2 Set the desired function   e Press the  lt  lt  gt  key to select the  function to be set    gt  The selected function and Feature  guide  p 48  will appear   e Turn the  lt   gt  dial to change the  setting     Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes    Single shooting       3 Take the picture     Press the shutter button completely to  take the picture    gt  The captured image will be displayed     Fl For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting procedure   see page 64     41     Q  Quick Control for Shooting Functions       Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen  White balance correction   p 1
66.  sharper shot  The procedure explained here is  based on the EF S 18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS II lens as an example      IS stands for Image Stabilizer        Set the IS switch to  lt ON gt        Set also the camera   s power switch to   lt ON gt                     2 Press the shutter button halfway    gt  The Image Stabilizer will operate     3 Take the picture     When the picture looks steady in the  viewfinder  press the shutter button  completely to take the picture     Q e  The Image Stabilizer may not be effective if the subject moves at the time  of exposure   e  The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as  on a rocking boat     Fl   The Image Stabilizer can operate with the focus mode switch set to  either  lt  AF  gt  or  lt MF gt       If the camera is mounted on a tripod  you can save battery power by  switching the IS switch to  lt OFF gt     e  The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a  monopod      Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the  shooting conditions  However  the following lenses switch the IS mode  automatically    e EF S 18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS II e EF S 18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS    EF S 15 85mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM e EF S 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6 IS    EF S 55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS II    38    Basic Operation x     Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity    Turn the dioptric adjustment   knob      Turn the knob left or right until the  nine AF points in the viewfinder look ie  sharp              Fl
67.  speed  the less  smooth the subject s movement will look     145           Shooting Movies    About the Information Display    e Each time you press the  lt INFO  gt  button  the information display will  change     Picture Style   Movie shooting remaining time   Elapsed time        AF point  Quick mode        Magnifying frame  Recording  movie                    AF mode     AM   Live mode     A      Face detection Live  mode     AMD   Quick mode    Movie shooting  mode  White balance    Auto Lighting  Optimizer             Digital zoom   Image recording Fisz0 24 10 00  magnification  quality x                               Wee   oe Sr EEE SEEM eM LaLe Battery check                Movie recording size           Exposure mode     Autoexposure  cu     Manual exposure    Video snapshot      AE lock  LED light                   Frame rate Highlight tone  priority  Seer RERA Rec  level  Manual  Aperture         ISO speed  Video snapshot         Possible shots  shooting duration     Exposure compensation amount      When an Eye Fi card has been inserted in the camera  the Eye Fi transmission  status  p 265  will be displayed     F    f there is no card in the camera  the movie shooting remaining time will  be displayed in red     When movie shooting starts  the movie shooting remaining time will  change to the elapsed time     146           Shooting Movies  ee a_i se eet    F Notes for Both Autoexposure and Manual Exposure Shooting   e A movie file is recorded each time you shoot 
68.  sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes  properly with the camera     Cautions for Live View shooting  A non Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting     Q     f the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to  another camera brand  the camera may not operate properly and  malfunction may result       Do not attach a high voltage flash unit on the camera   s hot shoe  It might  not fire     264    Using Eye Fi Cards sx    With a commercially available Eye Fi card already set up  you can  automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or  upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN    The image transfer is a function of the Eye Fi card  For instructions on   how to set up and use the Eye Fi card or to troubleshoot any image   transfer problems  refer to the Eye Fi card   s instruction manual or  inquire the card   s manufacturer      The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye Fi card  functions  including wireless transfer   In case of an issue  with an Eye Fi card  please check with the card manufacturer   Also note that approval is required to use Eye Fi cards in  many countries or regions  Without approval  use of the card  is not permitted  If it is unclear whether the card has been  approved for use in your area  please check with the card  manufacturer        1 Insert an Eye Fi card   p 29     2 Select  Eye Fi settings    Auto power off 30 sec  e Under the        tab  select  Eye Fi     
69.  the  lt z  gt  dial       When a background music is set  the movie   s sound will not be played     MS  Bass Boost    This makes low pitched bass tones easier to hear  This function takes  effect only when playing back sound with the camera   s built in speaker   e Set   I Bass boost  to  Enable                  Q If the sound crackles  you should set   Bass boost  to  Disable      Bass boost Disable     Enable       F e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8  the continuous playback time  will be approx  2 hr  30 min  at 23  C 73  F      If you took a still photo while you shot the movie  the still photo will be  displayed for approx  1 sec  during the movie playback     213    XK Editing a Movie   s First and Last Scenes 1    You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1 sec  increments     D P  gt  Kd A I XIAO u    1 On the movie playback screen   select  X     gt  The editing screen will be displayed        Specify the part to be edited out     Select either  44   Cut beginning  or   E8   Cut end   then press  lt  gt     e Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to see the  previous or next frames  Holding it   wll zs down will fast forward the frames    e After deciding which part to edit out   press  lt  gt   The portion highlighted  in blue on the top of the screen is  what will remain        Check the edited movie      Select  P  and press  lt   amp   gt  to playback  the portion highlighted in blue      To change the editing  go back to step 2      To cancel the 
70.  the camera for some time or if there is  an important shoot coming up  have the camera checked by your Canon  dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly        14    Handling Precautions    LCD Monitor   e Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision  technology with over 99 99  effective pixels  there might be a few dead  pixels among the remaining 0 01  or less pixels  Dead pixels displaying  only black or red  etc   are not a malfunction  They do not affect the images  recorded      Ifthe LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period  screen burn in may  occur where you see remnants of what was displayed  However  this is only  temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few  days    e In low or high temperatures  the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it  might look black  It will return to normal at room temperature     Cards   To protect the card and its recorded data  note the following    e Do not drop  bend  or wet the card  Do not subject it to excessive force   physical shock  or vibration    e Do not touch the card   s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything  metallic    e Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field  such as a TV set  speakers  or magnet  Also avoid places prone to having  static electricity    e Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source    e  Store the card in a case    e Do not store the card in hot  dusty  or 
71.  the grays  and highlights becomes smoother     Q   With setting 1  the Auto Lighting Optimizer  p 109  is automatically set to   Disable  and the setting cannot be changed   e With setting 1  noise may become slightly more pronounced than with  setting 0     F With setting 1  the settable range will be ISO 200   6400   Also  the  lt D  gt  icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the  viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled     Custom Function Settings    Se SS ES SS es _ y     C Fn Ill  Autofocus Drive    C Fn 7 AF assist beam firing    The AF assist beam can be emitted by the camera   s built in flash or by an  external  EOS dedicated Speedlite   0  Enable  If necessary  the AF assist beam will be emitted by the built in flash or  external Speedlite   1  Disable  The AF assist beam is not emitted   2  Enable external flash only  If an external Speedlite is attached  it will emit the AF assist beam when  necessary  The camera   s built in flash will not fire the AF assist beam   3  IR AF assist beam only  Among external Speedlites  only those which have an infrared AF assist  beam will be able to emit the beam  This prevents any Speedlite which  uses a series of small flashes  like the built in flash  from firing the AF   assist beam   With an EX series Speedlite equipped with a LED light  the LED light will  not automatically turn on for AF assist        Fl If the external Speedlite   s  AF assist beam firing  Custom Function is set  to  Disabled   the S
72.  the shutter speed and aperture to suit  the subject   s brightness  This is called Program AE     Tie 5 1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt P gt            Focus the subject      Look through the viewfinder and aim  the selected AF point over the  subject  Then press the shutter button  halfway     gt  The dot inside the AF point achieving  focus lights briefly in red  and the  focus confirmation light  lt   gt  in the  viewfinder   s bottom right lights  with  One Shot AF      gt  The shutter speed and aperture will  be set automatically and displayed in  the viewfinder         3 Check the display   e A standard exposure will be obtained    as long as the shutter speed and  aperture display do not blink         TOL aeteaWeetet2 50 a       Take the picture     Compose the shot and press the  shutter button completely     74    P  Program AE    34 Shooting Tips   e  Change the ISO speed or use the built in flash   To match the subject and ambient lighting level  you can change the  ISO speed  p 79  or use the built in flash  p 90   In the  lt P gt  mode   the built in flash will not fire automatically  So under low light  press  the  lt   gt   Flash  button to raise the built in flash     e The program can be shifted   Program shift   After pressing the shutter button halfway  turn the  lt  gt  dial to  change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination o   program   Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture  is taken  Program shift is not possible with flash   
73.  to a different compression  rate  Even with the same number of pixels  the   image has higher  image quality  If al is selected  the image quality will be slightly lower   but more images can be saved to the card  Both  2 and  3 have d   Fine  quality    e   could take more shots than the number of possible shots  indicated   Depending on the shooting conditions  you may be able to take  more shots than was indicated  It might also be fewer than indicated   The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate     e  Does the camera display the maximum burst   The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder   s right side  Since  it is only a single digit indicator 0   9  any number higher than 9 will  be displayed only as    9     Note that this number will also be displayed  even when no card is installed in the camera  Be careful not to shoot  without a card in the camera     e  When should   use M   images require processing with your computer  For details  see     About WW    and    About MM   ML    on the next page     77    CEM Setting the Image recording Quality     M   About    is the raw image data before it is made into ML or other images   Although images require software like Digital Photo Professional   provided  p 305  so they can be displayed on the computer  they also  offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only with MW  GM is  effective when you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot  an important subject     About M  AL    mm 
74.  to print 2  4  8  9  16  or 20 images on one sheet   20 up Hi Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper 2   35 up Ed    20 up Ef  will have the shooting information   imprinted   Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings                  1 From the Exif data  the camera name  lens name  shooting mode  shutter speed  aperture   exposure compensation amount  ISO speed  white balance  etc   will be imprinted     2 After ordering the prints with    Digital Print Order Format  DPOF      p 245   you should  print by following    Direct Printing with DPOF     p 248      Q If the image   s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper   s aspect ratio   the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print  If  the image is cropped  it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer  number of pixels     239    A Printing       we  On  a    Q  off  D           Ai    Trimming  Paper settings  Cancel    RJ 9x13cm    E  Photo  EJ Borderless       A Set the printing effects    Set as necessary  If you need not set  any printing effects  go to step 5   What is displayed on the screen  differs depending on the printer   Select the option on the upper right   circled in the screenshot   then press   lt   gt     Select the desired printing effect  then  press  lt   gt     If the  lt  E  gt  icon is displayed brightly  next to  lt  INJ  gt   you can also adjust  the printing effect  p 242 
75.  to properly display images captured  with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name  was changed                  gt   Searching for Images Quickly ma    EI Display Multiple Images on One Screen  Index display     Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine  images on one screen     1 Playback the image     When you press the  lt  gt   gt  button  the  last image captured will be displayed           2 Switch to the index display      Press the  lt f3 Q  gt  button     gt  The 4 image index display will  appear  The currently selected image  will be highlighted in a blue frame    e Press the  lt E3 Q  gt  button again to  switch to the 9 image index display      Pressing the  lt Q  gt  button will switch  the display between 9 images  4  images and one image displayed           3 Select an image     Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to move the blue  frame to select an image     Turning the  lt   gt  dial will display the  next screen or previous image   e Press  lt   gt  and the selected image  will be displayed as a single image        202       E  Searching for Images Quickly  iem Ss eae ae      Jump through Images  Jump display     With the single image display  you can turn the  lt  gt  dial to jump    through the images forward or back according to the jump method that  was set        F  1 Select  Image jump w  2     Histogram   Briahtness e Under the   1   tab  select  Image  oe jump w  233   then press  lt    gt    Image ju
76.  who mainly shoot RAW images     Image Viewing and Editing Software       ZoomBrowser EX  Windows    ImageBrowser  Macintosh     You can view  edit and print JPEG images on your computer    You can organize and sort images by shooting date or theme    You can play and edit movies  MOV files   video snapshot albums  and  extract still photos from movies     Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first  time and amateur users     Picture Style File Creating Software    Picture Style Editor    This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in    processing images     You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and    create save an original Picture Style file     302    Software Start Guide   5 Ee eet  Installing the Software    Compatible OS Windows7 Windows Vista Windows XP    1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer     Q   Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the  software  The software will not be installed correctly     2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk  CD      3 Click  Easy Installation  to start installation     pragi EOS DIGITAL    Solution Disk         Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation  procedure     When installation ends  the window for Step 4 appears     A Click  Restart         5 Once your computer has restarted  remove the CD     To download images from the cameras  refer to the EOS Utility  Instruction Manual  PDF electronic manual   B  e  
77.  with a cloth  Doing so may trap  heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire       If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera   promptly remove the battery pack and back up battery  This is to prevent fire and  electrical shock       Do not use or leave the battery pack or back up battery in a hot environment  Doing so  may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life  The battery pack or back up  battery can also become hot and cause skin burns       Do not use paint thinner  benzene  or other organic solvents to clean the equipment   Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard                                            If the product does not work properly or requires repair  contact  your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center     298    European Union  and EEA  only     These symbols indicate that this product is not to be  disposed of with your household waste  according to  the WEEE Directive  2002 96 EC   the Battery Directive   2006 66 EC  and or your national laws implementing  those Directives    3s If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol   shown above  in accordance with the Battery Directive    this indicates that a heavy metal  Hg   Mercury  Cd   Cadmium  Pb   Lead  is   present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable   threshold specified in the Battery Directive    This product should be handed over to a designated collection point  e g   on an   authorized
78. 00 V AC to 240 V AC 50   60 Hz power source  If necessary  attach a commercially available  plug adapter for the respective country or region  Do not attach any  portable voltage transformer to the battery charger  Doing so can  damage the battery charger     If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully  charged  the battery has reached the end of its service life   Purchase a new battery     Q e After disconnecting the charger   s power plug  do not touch the prongs for    at least 3 sec       Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP E8      The Battery Pack LP E8 is dedicated to Canon products only  Using it  with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction  or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable     27    Installing and Removing the Battery mum    Installing the Battery  Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 into the camera           1 Open the cover       Slide the lever as shown by the  arrows and open the cover              Insert the battery    e Insert the end with the battery  contacts    e Insert the battery until it locks in  place           Close the cover     Press the cover until it snaps shut           Open the cover and remove the   battery    e Press the battery release lever as shown  by the arrow and remove the battery      To prevent short circuiting of the  battery contacts  be sure to attach the  protective cover  provided  p 26  to  the battery              Q After opening the batte
79. 19  Aperture  p 96     Shutter speed  p 94                  Highlight tone priority   p 254   Shooting mode   p 22     Exposure compensation     Y WETO ALASE  ISO speed  p 79   AEB setting  p 103  105  RAE ash exposure  compensation  p 104   Ex  ee AW  OO Built in flash function    AF mode  p 83  Sei  0  ai   E ECM RAWEY       Image recording quality    White balance  p 117      Shutter speed  p 76    Auto Lighting Optimizer   p 109    White balance bracketing    p 120     3  2  1   24003 G I     Picture Style  p 81     Drive mode  p 88  89   Metering mode  p 102      F Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen     Function Setting Screen    Select the desired function and press     SO   1A A Aro  lt   gt   The function   s setting screen  3  2  1  0  1  2 13 will appear    AWB    Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key or turn the  onEsHoT CC    amp    lt  gt  dial to change the setting     Flash exposure comp   gt    There are also functions to be set    with the  lt INFO  gt  button   e Press  lt  gt  to finalize the setting and  ESUN POSERO to return to the Quick Control screen        2010 01 52 3 2 3    When using external flash   its flash exposure comp   overrides camera s       42    m Menu Operations sx    With menus  you can set various functions such as the image recording  quality  date time  etc  While looking at the LCD monitor  use the   lt MENU gt  button   lt  lt   gt  cross keys  and  lt    gt  button on the camera  back to operate the menus    
80. 2  Fade 3     MENU s        MEM  Slide Show  Auto Playback      EEEE   _    M ees    Slide show A Start the slide show    Gi IET  a6 images e Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select  Start    fae AI images then press  lt    gt    Bassin atun  gt  After  Loading image     is displayed   Start the slide show will start   mmo Quit the slide show     To quit the slide show and return to the   setting screen  press the  lt  MENU gt  button        Selecting the Background Music    J Sel  Play background music    Set  Background music  to  On    Background music On then press  lt   amp   gt    ANGELS   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the  BELOVED k    GO SPORTS desired background music then press  MEMORTES  lt  gt   You can also select multiple    background musics        valle MENU     e To hear a sample of a background music  press the  lt INFO  gt  button   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to listen to another background music  To stop  listening to the background music  press the  lt INFO  gt  button again   Adjust the sound volume by turning the  lt   gt  dial    e After selecting the setting  press the  lt MENU gt  button     F    To pause the slide show  press  lt    gt   During pause   II  will be displayed   on the upper left of the image  Press  lt 6   gt  again to resume the slide show   e During auto playback  you can press the  lt INFO  gt  button to change the   still photo display format  p 71     During movie playback  you can adjust the sound volume by turning the    lt
81. 304x1728 2592x1456  1728x1728   4 5 megapixels     4 0 megapixels     3 8 megapixels     3 0 megapixels    s2 1920x1280 1696x1280  1920x1080 1280x1280   2 5 megapixels     2 2 megapixels     2 1 megapixels     1 6 megapixels    53 720x480 640x480 720x400  480x480    350 000 pixels     310 000 pixels     290 000 pixels     230 000 pixels    Q e Asterisked image recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect    ratio     e  The image area displayed for asterisked image recording qualities is  slightly larger than the recorded area  Check the captured images on the  LCD monitor when shooting    e  f you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this  camera in the 1 1 aspect ratio  the images might not be correctly printed     e Metering timer      You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed  AE lock  time   This option is not displayed in Basic Zone modes   Metering  timer is fixed at 16 sec      F If you select  Ga  Dust Delete Data         Sensor cleaning        Clear  settings   or      Firmware Ver    the Live View shooting will terminate     130    Changing the Autofocus Mode mus    Selecting the AF Mode    The AF modes available are  Live mode    X Live mode   face  detection  p 132   and  Quick mode   p 136     If you want to achieve precise focus  set the lens focus mode switch to   lt MF gt   magnify the image  and focus manually  p 138      Select the AF mode   e Under the  Ai  tab  select  AF mode   AF made Coe      tab in Basic
82. Auto   Manual 157  AF mode Live mode   X Live mode   Quick mode 157  AF with shutter button Disable   Enable 157  during            AFIAE lock   AE lock AF        Shutter AE lock sa Se          b AF AF lock  no AE lock   158  utton AE AF  no AE lock  Remote control Disable   Enable 159  T Gighh    A Highlight tone Disable   Enable 159  priority       Com  Movie 2  Red        Movie recording size   1920x1080  T3   I     Ta                                                    150  Movie recording size   1280x720  l6   50     640x480  T     I     Digital zoom  OFF   3x   10x 152  Sound recording  Auto   Manual   Disable  Sound recording Recording level 160  Wind filter  Disable   Enable  Metering timer pen   16 sec    30 sec    1 min    10 min    161  min   Grid display Off   Grid 1   Grid 2 161  Video snapshot Disable   2 sec  movie   4 sec  movie   153    8 sec  movie                   273    MM  Menu Settings                                                                                                                                           Com  Movie 3  Red  Page  Exposure i 1 3 stop increments   5 stops 162  compensation  Ao Lighting Disable   Low   Standard   Strong 162  ptimizer  Custom White Balance  Manual setting of white balance 162  2 3A  Auto    22S  Standard    e 2P  Portrait    Picture Style k 2L  Landscape   E N Neutral        Faithful   162        Monochrome    2 21  User Def  1  2  3  Gr Shooting 1  Red     AL AL AM AM  4S1   S1 S2 83   Quality  a  76  Beep E
83. Autofocus Mode    suum    You can select the AF  autofocus  mode to suit the shooting conditions  or subject  In Basic Zone modes  the most suitable AF mode is set  automatically     1 On the lens  set the focus mode  switch to  lt AF gt               Press the  lt  gt  AF gt  button    gt   AF mode  will appear                                Select the AF mode    One Shot AF   Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key or turn the   ONESHOT airocus AI sERvo  lt    gt  dial to select the desired AF  mode  then press  lt   gt      Focus the subject    e Aim the AF point over the subject and  press the shutter button halfway  The  camera will then autofocus in the  selected AF mode     One Shot AF for Still Subjects    Suited for still subjects  When you press the shutter button   halfway  the camera will focus only once      When focus is achieved  the dot inside the AF point achieving focus  lights briefly in red  and the focus confirmation light  lt   gt  in the  viewfinder will also light    e With evaluative metering  p 102   the exposure setting will be set at  the same time focus is achieved      While you hold down the shutter button halfway  the focus will be  locked  You can then recompose the shot if desired        83    AF  Changing the Autofocus Mode    ion o l l aMMoal U lM O Ml UUM     Fl    f focus cannot be achieved  the focus confirmation light  lt   gt  in the  viewfinder will blink  If this occurs  a picture cannot be taken even if the  shutter button is pressed complet
84. Automatic selection     Picture Style Auto  Drive mode a  Single shooting  Guiness Standard  Metering mode 2   Evaluative  metering  Peripheral Enable    ISO speed AUTO  Auto  illumination Correction data  ISO Auto Max   3200 correction retained  Exposure Canceled Color space sRGB  compensation AEB White balance  Auto   Built in flash func  NormalFiring Custom white Canceled  setting balance  Flash exposure 0  Zero  WEB correction Canceled  compensation WB BKT Canceled  Custom Functions   Unchanged File numbering Continuous   Auto cleaning Enable   Dust Delete Data   Erased             Camera Settings                                                             Auto power off 30 sec    Beep Enable  Release shutter Enable  without card   Image review 2 sec   Histogram Brightness  Image jump wi  _      10 images   Auto rotate Ong     LCD brightness t HH Se  LCD offfon button   Shutter button  Date Time Unchanged  Language Unchanged  Video system Unchanged  Feature guide Enable  Copyright information   Unchanged  Bass boost Disable  Control over HDMI   Disable  Eye Fi transmission   Disable   My Menu settings   Unchanged             177       Handy Features    Live View Shooting Settings Movie Shooting Settings                                                                Live View shooting   Enable Movie exposure  Auto   AF mode Live mode AF mode Live mode   Grid display Off AF w  shutter Disable   Aspect ratio 3 2 button during       ina ti     Metering timer 16 sec     Shutte
85. CEL SR1UA212    CANON INC  2012 PRINTED IN THE EU    
86. Editing with a Personal Computer     See the PDF file instruction manual for ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser  p 305   The movie files recorded in the card can  be transferred to a personal computer  and played or edited with ZoomBrowser  EX ImageBrowser  provided software   p 302     You can also extract a single frame from  a movie and save it as a still photo           Q   To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer  use a  high performance personal computer  Regarding the computer hardware  requirements for ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser  see the PDF file  instruction manual    e Ifyou want to use commercially available software to playback or edit the  movies  be sure it is compatible with MOV files  For details on  commercially available software  inquire the software maker     211        Playing Movies mum    Playback the image   e Press the  lt   gt   gt  button to display  images        2 Select a movie      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select a movie      On the single image display  the   lt  R Gal  gt  icon displayed on the upper left  indicates a movie  If the movie is a video  snapshot   lt E  gt  will be displayed    e You can press the  lt INFO  gt  button to  switch the shooting information  display  p 227       On the index display  the perforation on  the left edge of the image indicates a  movie  As movies cannot be played on  the index display  press  lt   amp   gt  to  switch to the single image display        3 On the single image display   pre
87. Fine  aM Medium Normal  asi Small 1 Fine  asi Small 1 Normal     2 Small 2  Fine    3 Small 3  Fine   RAW   G  A L RAW Large Fine        Number of possible shots        Number of possible shots  during WB bracketing          Self timer countdown                WB White balance correction  p 119      White balance bracketing  p 120            Metering mode  p 102      amp  Evaluative metering      Partial metering   CI Spot metering   CI Center weighted average metering    The display will show only the settings currently applied     20    Nomenclature  EO a isi _ i  Viewfinder Information    Spot metering circle AF point activation indicator  lt   gt         Focusing screen         AF points                 lt ISO gt   ISO speed    We   lt B gt                            F   ye eas White balance  ee eR CS aia anO correction   lt   gt  AE lock  2  gt  Focus  AEB in progress confirmation  light   lt 4  gt  Flash ready     Max  burst  Improper FE lock  warning  lt B W gt  Monochrome shooting  X SO speed   lt  y gt  High speed sync       FP flash  1  lt D  gt  Highlight tone priority     lt 4  gt  FE lock   FEB in progress           Exposure level indicator  Exposure compensation amount                    lt  Z gt  Flash exposure AEB range _ ae  compensation Red eye reduction lamp on indicator      Aperture  Shutter speed Card full warning  FuLL   FE lock  FEL  Card error warning  Card   Busy  buSY  No card warning  Card     Built in flash recycling    buSY     The display will s
88. For images taken with another camera  selectable functions may be  limited     209       Enjoying Movies m     Basically  you can playback movies in the following three ways     Playback on a TV set  p 218  221     Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI  Cable HTC 100  sold separately  to  connect the camera to a TV set  Then  you can playback the captured movies  and still photos on the TV    If you have a High Definition TV set and  connect your camera with an HDMI  cable  you can watch Full High Definition   Full HD  1920x1080  and High   Definition  HD  1280x720  movies with  higher image quality        Q e  Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV  files     Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal  the camera  cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable     Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB  cable  movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved     Playback on the Camera   s LCD Monitor  p 212 217     You can playback movies on the  camera   s LCD monitor  You can also edit  out the movie s first and last scenes  and  playback the images and movies in the  card in an automatic slide show           Q A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and  played back with the camera  However  video snapshot albums edited with  ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser  provided software  can be played on the  camera     210           Enjoying Movies       Playback and 
89. High ISO speed noise reduction O  p 254  6   Highlight tone priority O  C Fn Ill  Autofocus Drive  7   AF assist beam firing O  With Arama     p 255                      8   Mirror lockup         If you use an EX series Speedlite  sold separately  equipped with a LED light   the LED light will turn on for AF assist even in the AMIS and AF modes     C Fn IV  Operation Others                9   Shutter AE lock button O  p 256   10   Assign SET button O  Except 3    11   LCD display when power ON p 257                         F The shaded Custom Functions do not take effect during Live View  LV   shooting   Settings are disabled      251    mW Custom Function Settings   ma    Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function  type  C Fn    Exposure  C Fn Il  Image  C Fn Ill  Autofocus Drive  C Fn  IV  Operation Others        C Fn I  Exposure    C Fn 1 Exposure level increments  0  1 3 stop  1  1 2 stop  Sets 1 2 stop increments for the shutter speed  aperture  exposure  compensation  AEB  flash exposure compensation  etc  Effective when    you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1 3 stop  increments     Fl With setting 1  the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on  the LCD monitor as shown below     2 1S0 n te    3 2 1 0 9 2 3  C Fn 2 ISO expansion    0  Off  1  On  For the ISO speed     H     equivalent to ISO 12800  will be selectable     Note that if  C Fn 6  Highlight tone priority  has been set to  1   Enable   
90. If  0  Disable  is set   H   can be set  p 252      281    Troubleshooting Guide    When I use the  lt  Av  gt  mode with flash  the shutter speed  becomes slow    e If you shoot at night when the background is dark  the shutter speed  becomes slow automatically  slow sync shooting  so that both the  subject and background are properly exposed  If you do not want a  slow shutter speed to be set  set  3  Flash sync  speed in Av mode   in      Custom Functions  C Fn   to 1 or 2  p 252      The built in flash pops up by itself     e Inthe G        X  and Bi modes  the built in flash will pop up  automatically when flash is necessary     The built in flash does not fire     e If you shoot continuously with the built in flash at short intervals  the  flash might stop operating to protect the flash unit       cannot set flash exposure compensation with  External  flash func  setting      e If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite    Flash exp  comp   p 182  cannot be set in the  External flash func   setting  screen  Also  if you set flash exposure compensation with the  camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external  Speedlite  the Speedlite   s flash exposure compensation setting will  override the camera   s  When the Speedlite   s flash exposure  compensation is canceled  set to 0   flash exposure compensation can  be set with the camera     High speed sync cannot be set in the  lt Av gt  mode   e  Under      Custom Functions  C Fn
91. Manual      vie exposure i   Select  Manual   then press  lt   gt    ASEE             Set the shutter speed and  125 8 0 3 2 1 0 4 23 p       aperture     To set the shutter speed  turn the  er ee  lt   gt  dial  The settable shutter  speeds depend on the frame rate   lt P gt      Teo   o   1 4000 sec    1 60 sec       Bo   I5   faa  1 4000 sec    1 30 sec     To set the aperture  hold down the    lt  A  A  gt  button and turn the  lt  gt    dial     5 Set the ISO speed      Press the  lt ISO gt  button and press the   lt  lt  gt  gt  key or turn the  lt    gt  dial to  select the ISO speed       AUTO  setting    ISO 100   6400  e Manual ISO setting   ISO 100   6400                 Shooting Movies    Focus and shoot the movie      The procedure is the same as steps 2  and 3 for    Autoexposure Shooting      p 142      Q   AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set      Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not  recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded    e If you use a lens whose maximum aperture changes while you zoom   you should not zoom while shooting a movie  Changes in the exposure  may be recorded       If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting  the movie image might  flicker     Al   With ISO Auto  the standard movie exposure will usually be obtained  even if the light level changes     When shooting a movie of a moving subject  a shutter speed of 1 30 sec   to 1 125 sec  is recommended  The faster the shutter
92. Max  diameter x length  Approx  68 5 x 70 mm   2 7 x 2 8 in    Weight  Approx  200 g   7 1 oz    Hood  EW 60C  sold separately    Case  LP814  sold separately    e EF S 18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 Ill   Angle of view  Diagonal extent  74  20      27  50       Horizontal extent  64  30      23  20     Vertical extent  45  30      15  40     Lens construction  11 elements in 9 groups  Minimum aperture     22   36  Closest focusing distance  0 25 m   0 82 ft   From image sensor plane   Max  magnification  0 34x  at 55mm     Field of view  207 x 134   67 x 45 mm   8 1 x 5 3   2 6 x 1 8 in   at  0 25 m  0 82 ft     Filter size  58 mm   Lens cap  E 58 E 58 II    Max  diameter x length  Approx  68 5 x 70 0 mm   2 7 x 2 8 in   294    Specifications    Weight   Hood   Case     Approx  195 g   6 9 oz   EW 60C  sold separately   LP814  sold separately     e EF S 18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS    Angle of view     Lens construction   Minimum aperture   Closest focusing distance      Max  magnification   Image Stabilizer    Filter size    Lens cap    Max  diameter x length   Weight    Hood    Case     Diagonal extent  74  20      11  30     Horizontal extent  64  30      9  30      Vertical extent  45  30      6  20      16 elements in 12 groups      22   36   At 18mm focal length  0 49 m   1 61 ft    327 x 503 mm   12 9 x 19 8 in  field of view   At 135mm focal length  0 45 m   1 48 ft    75 x 112 mm   3 0 x 4 4 in  field of view     Distance from image sensor plane  0 21x  at 135mm    Lens shift type   67
93. Monitor   Type  TFT color liquid crystal monitor   Monitor size and dots  Wide  7 7 cm  3 0 inches   3 2  with approx  1 04 million  dots   Angle adjustment  Possible   Brightness adjustment  Manual  7 levels    Interface languages  25   Feature guide  Displayable    291    Specifications    e Playback   Image display formats  Single image  Single image   Info  Basic info  shooting  info  histogram   4 image index  9 image index  image  rotate possible   Zoom magnification  Approx  1 5x   10x   Image browsing methods  Single image  jump by 10 or 100 images  by shooting  date  by folder  by movies  by stills  by rating    Highlight alert  Overexposed highlights blink   Movie playback  Enabled  LCD monitor  video audio OUT  HDMI OUT   Built in speaker   Slide show  All images  by date  by folder  movies  stills  or by rating  Five transition effects selectable   Background music  Selectable for slide shows and movie playback   Bass boost  Provided    e Post Processing of Images    Creative filters  Grainy B W  Soft focus  Fish eye effect  Toy camera  effect  Miniature effect  Resize  Possible    e Direct Printing    Compatible printers  PictBridge compatible printers  Printable images  JPEG and RAW images  Print ordering  DPOF Version 1 1 compatible    e Custom Functions   Custom Functions  11   My Menu registration  Possible   Copyright information  Entry and inclusion possible    e Interface   Audio video OUT    Digital terminal  Analog video  Compatible with NTSC PAL  stereo
94. Playback video snapshot    The video snapshot just recorded will be played   For playback operations  see the table below        album  Step 5     g Do not save to album  Step 4   K  Delete without saving to    If you want to delete the video snapshot you  just recorded and not save it to the album   select  OK                         Playback video snapshot  Operations  Operation Playback Description  S Exit Returns to the previous screen    gt  Play By pressing  lt     gt   you can play or pause the just     recorded video snapshot        M4 First frame    Displays the first scene of the album   s first video snapshot           Skip backward     Each time you press  lt     gt   the video snapshot skips back  by a few seconds        4ll Previous frame    Each time you press  lt   gt   a single previous frame is  displayed  If you hold down  lt  gt   it will rewind the movie        II  Next frame    Each time you press  lt   gt   the movie will play frame by   frame  If you hold down  lt   gt   it will fast forward the movie         gt   Skip forward     Each time you press  lt   gt   the video snapshot skips  forward by a few seconds         gt  gt I Last frame    Displays the last scene of the album   s last video snapshot                    E Playback position  mm    ss    Playback time  minutes seconds    You can adjust the built in speaker   s  p 210  sound volume  mill Volume J P  p 210     by turning the  lt  7  gt  dial             With  Skip backward Skip forward   t
95. RC 1 RC 5  sold separately  can also be used     The Remote Controller can also be used for shooting movies  p 159    Remote Controller RC 5 cannot be used to take still photos in the movie  shooting mode     261    Remote Control Shooting       f Remote Switch RS 60E3  Sold separately     Remote Switch RS 60E3  sold separately  comes with an approx   60 cm 2 0 ft cord  When connected to the camera   s remote control  terminal  Remote Switch RS 60E3 can be used to press the shutter  button halfway and completely           Using the Eyepiece Cover    When you use the self timer  bulb  or Remote Switch and do not look  through the viewfinder  stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the  image to look dark  To prevent this  use the eyepiece cover  p 25   attached to the camera strap    During Live View shooting and movie shooting  attaching the  eyepiece cover is unnecessary           Remove the eyecup   e Push the bottom of the eyecup to  remove           2 Attach the eyepiece cover      Slide the eyepiece cover down into  the eyepiece groove to attach it    e After taking the picture  detach the  eyepiece cover and attach the  eyecup by sliding it down the  eyepiece groove                 262    External SpeedliteS mE    EOS dedicated  EX series Speedlites    Basically operates like a built in flash for easy operation    When an Ex series Speedlite  sold separately  is attached to the  camera  almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera  In other  words  it is
96. SE Se Se       Basic Zone Creative Zone om  SaD a a ew   e Tv  Av  M  A DEP            ojo oj ojo O O O             Oo       Mode Dial          Metering Evaluative e    mode Metering mode  selection    Program shift       O  O          Exposure  compensation    Exposure   AEB    AE lock    Depth of field  preview    Single shooting  O   0  O SERS  O    Continuous shooting    ore                      O  O  O       Drive    10 sec   olo    O  O  O  O  O  O       2  2 sec         olojololojojololojoliojolUu  oj  ojojojo  ojolojo  oj  ojojojoj  ojolojo    oj  ojolojolo  oj  jojojojoj  ojolojlo  e    Wc  Continuous   O   O       Fires automatically           Flash on       Flash off e       Built in  flash    OVO TOTON    Red eye reduction       FE lock          Flash exposure  compensation       Wireless control       External   Function setting       flash Custom Function  setting    Live View shooting GLANO IOE O O E    Aspect ratio 5                Quick Control oj  oj  ojojojlojojo  Feature guide ojololojolojoljo                                                       OJo rOTo rororo Jora OOTO  oj  oj  ojojo  o  ojojojo  o  jo  ojojojojoj  oj  ojolojo  oj  jo  oj  ojojoj  o  o  ojojojo  oj  jo  oj  oj  ojojoj  o  ojojojolojo        5   Settable only for Live View shooting    6   Settable only for auto exposures     269    U Menu Settings mE    For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting                      Gr Shooting 1  Red  Page    AL AL AM AM  4S1  AS  S2 S3    Quality  
97. User selectable   Not selectable  Function Gy D  a ja   p 50     p 55     p 56     p 59     p 60     p 61     p 62     p 63   C  Single shooting O   O  O0 Oo  oO O  PER     Continuous shooting O    O  mode Sii 78  10 sec  Remote control   O   O   O  O   O  O  O   0  mei a ee ToTofolololololo  Automatic firing e O    e e  Flash firing  Flash on  Fires at all times  O  Flash off     o e  J  Shoot by ambience selection  p 65  ololololol  o  Shoot by lighting or scene type  p 68  ololol  o  Blurring sharpening the background  p 57  O                                       Use the  lt  A    gt  key to set the number of continuous shots     64    Shoot by Ambience Selection mx    Except in the  lt  4J  gt   Scene Intelligent Auto  and  lt     gt   Flash Off   Basic Zone modes  you can select the ambience for shooting                                   Ambience  G   9   sa      amp    Ambience Effect    1  Standard setting o  ojojolojo No setting    2  Vivid O O  O O  O   O  Low  Standard   Strong   3  Soft O O  O O  O   O  Low  Standard   Strong   4  Warm O O  O O  O   O  Low  Standard   Strong   5  Intense O O  O O  O   O  Low  Standard   Strong   6  Cool O O  O O  O   O  Low  Standard   Strong   7  Brighter O  O O O  O   O  Low  Medium   High    8  Darker O  O O O  O   O  Low  Medium   High    9  Monochrome O  O O O  O   O  Blue B W  Sepia                                        Set the Mode Dial to any of the   following modes   lt C gt    lt  gt      lt a gt    lt  gt    lt A  gt 
98. W  Menu Settings                                                                                  Set up 1  Yellow  Page  30 sec    1 min    2 min    4 min    8 min     Auto power off 15 min    Off 167  Auto rotate Ong  amp    On   Off 174  Format Initialize and erase data on the card 45  File numbering Continuous   Auto reset   Manual reset 170  Select folder Create and select a folder 168  Screen color Select the shooting settings screen color 179  merses eag e Ee   aes    Displayed only when an Eye Fi card is used       Set up 2  Yellow   LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 167  LCD off on button Shutter button   Shutter DISP   Remains on 179  Date Time Sey  year  month  day  and time  hour  34  Language    Select the interface language 35  Video system NTSC   PAL 221  Auto cleaning  Enable   Disable 484  Sensor cleaning Clean now  Clean manually 187  Feature guide Enable   Disable 48  Y  Set up 3  Yellow   Custom Functions  C Fn    Customize camera functions as desired 250  Display copyright information   Enter author   s  Copyright information   name   Enter copyright details   Delete 172  copyright information  Clear settings sea ca settings   Clear all Custom 176  Firmware Ver  For updating the firmware      amp  My Menu  Green   My Menu settings Register frequently used menu items and 258          Custom Functions          272          CEM Menu Settings   i     m 8 8 2S Ee M i          For Movie Shooting             Oim  Movie 1  Red  Page  Movie exposure 
99. WOWUeD    2009 SOS    TWANVIN NOILONULSNI    og EFS 18 55  es   Ma    The    Software Start Guide    and    Quick Reference Guide    are  provided at end of this manual        ENGLISH    INSTRUCTION  MANUAL    introduction me    The EOS 600D is a high performance  digital single lens reflex camera  featuring a fine detail CMOS sensor with approx  18 0 effective  megapixels  DIGIC 4  high precision and high speed 9 point AF   approx  3 7 fps continuous shooting  Live View shooting  and Full High   Definition  Full HD  movie shooting    The camera is highly responsive for shooting at anytime  provides many  functions fitted for advanced shooting  and offers many other features     Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further  Familiarize Yourself with the Camera   With a digital camera  you can immediately view the image you have  captured  While reading this manual  take a few test shots and see how  they come out  You can then better understand the camera    To avoid botched pictures and accidents  first read the    Safety  Warnings     p 297  298  and    Handling Precautions     p 14  15      Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability   After shooting  playback and check whether the images have been  properly recorded  If the camera or memory card is faulty and the  images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer  Canon  cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused     Copyrights   Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your rec
100. a movie    e  The image   s field of view is approx  99     e  The sound will be recorded by the camera   s built in monaural  microphone  p 142       Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external  microphone  commercially available  equipped with a stereo mini plug   3 5mm dia   to the camera   s external microphone IN terminal  p 18     e Movie related settings are under the  Gham    5m   and  P    menu  tabs  p 157     e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8  the total shooting time will be  as follows  At 23  C 73  F  Approx  1 hr  40 min   At 0  C 32  F  Approx  1  hr  20 min     Final Image Simulation    The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style  white F  balance  etc   in the movie image so you can see what the captured   movie will look like    During movie shooting  the movie image will automatically reflect the  settings listed below     Final image simulation for movie shooting   e Picture Style     All parameters such as sharpness  contrast  color saturation  and color tone  will be reflected    White balance   Exposure   Depth of field   Auto Lighting Optimizer   Peripheral illumination correction   Highlight tone priority    147           Shooting Movies  SS SE      Shooting Still Photos       While shooting a movie  you can also  take a still photo by pressing the shutter  button completely        Shooting Stills in the  lt       gt  Mode   e  f you take a still photo during movie shooting  the movie will record  a st
101. ain     The camera does not operate even when the power switch is  set to  lt ON gt        The battery is not properly installed in the camera  p 28      Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed  p 28       Make sure the card slot cover is closed  p 29       Recharge the battery  p 26     e Press the  lt DISP  gt  button  p 47     The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is  set to  lt OFF gt       Ifthe power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card   the access lamp will still continue to light blink for a few seconds   When the image recording is completed  the power will turn off  automatically     278    Troubleshooting Guide  i   i     The battery becomes exhausted quickly     e Use a fully charged battery pack  p 26       The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over  repeated use  Purchase a new one    e If you use Live View shooting or shoot movies for a prolonged period   p 123  141   the number of possible shots will decrease    e If you hold down the shutter button for a long time or often use only the  AF without taking pictures  the number of possible shots will decrease    e If you often use the LCD monitor  the number of possible shots will  decrease    e If you use the lens Image Stabilizer  the number of possible shots will  decrease     The camera turns off by itself     e Auto power off is in effect  If you do not want auto power off to take  effect  set       Auto power off  to  Off   p 167     e Eve
102. alled the color space  With this  camera  you can set the color space to SRGB or Adobe RGB for  captured images  For normal shooting  SRGB is recommended    In Basic Zone modes  sRGB is set automatically     1 Select  Color space      Under the  A  tab  select  Color  space   then press  lt   gt      Set the desired color space     Select  SRGB  or  Adobe RGB   then  press  lt   gt      Color space b SRGB  Adobe RGB       About Adobe RGB    This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other  industrial uses  This setting is not recommended if you do not know  about image processing  Adobe RGB  and Design rule for Camera File  System 2 0  Exif 2 21     The image will look very subdued in a sRGB personal computer  environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for  Camera File System 2 0  Exif 2 21   Post processing of the image with  software will therefore be required     F    f the image is captured with the color space set to Adobe RGB  the file  name will start with    _MG_     first character is an underscore      The ICC profile is not appended  See explanations about the ICC profile  in the PDF Software Instruction Manual  p 305  on the CD ROM     121    Mirror Lock up to Reduce Camera Shake   m    The camera   s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can  blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close up  macro  lens   In such cases  mirror lockup is effective    Mirror lockup is enabled by setting  8  Mirror lockup  t
103. ance  If natural looking colors  cannot be obtained with  lt  MB  gt   you can select the white balance to  match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object                 oA Press the  lt  A WB gt  button   een  gt   White balance  will appear   Ki Nes      2 Select the white balance      Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key or turn the   lt  2  gt  dial to select the desired white  balance  then press  lt   gt        The    Approx      K     K  Kelvin   displayed for the following white  balance settings  lt    gt    lt B gt     lt d  gt    lt    gt  or  lt    gt  is the  respective color temperature           ax Custom White Balance    Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance  for a specific light source for better accuracy  Do this procedure under  the actual light source to be used     1 Photograph a white object   e  The plain  white object should fill the  spot metering circle     Focus manually and set the standard  exposure for the white object   e You can set any white balance                    Spot metering circle    117    WB  Matching the Light Source     eae  o es SS Se SS 8 Se SS      Select  Custom White Balance    oe e  Under the  A  tab  select  Custom  Metering mode a White Balance   then press  lt    gt    Custom White Balance  gt  The custom white balance selection    WB Shift BKT 0 0  0  Color space sRGB  Picture Style Auto    screen will appear           Import the white balance data      Select the image that wa
104. apter Kit ACK E8  sold separately   you can connect the  camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining  battery level           Connect the power cord      Connect the power cord as shown in  the illustration    e After using the camera  unplug the  power plug from the power outlet           Connect the DC Coupler       Connect the cord   s plug to the DC  Coupler           3 Insert the DC Coupler     Open the cover and insert the DC  Coupler until it locks in place        A Push in the DC cord     Open the DC cord hole cover and  install the cord as shown     Close the cover           Q Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera   s power  switch is set to  lt ON gt      260    Remote Control Shooting sx    Remote Controller RC 6  Sold separately     This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to  about 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera  You can either shoot  immediately or use a 2 sec  delay           Remote control sensor              Set the self timer to  lt 7    gt   p 89       Point the remote controller toward the camera   s remote control  sensor and press the transmit button     gt  The camera will autofocus     gt  When focus is achieved  the self timer lamp will light and the picture  will be taken     Q Camera misoperation may occur near certain types of fluorescent lights   During wireless remote control shooting  try to keep the camera away from  fluorescent light sources     F e Remote Controller 
105. ater  And do not subject the battery  pack or back up battery to strong physical shock      Do not install the battery pack or back up battery in reversed polarity          Do not  mix new and old or different types of batteries      Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range  of 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F   Also  do not exceed the recharging time      Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera   accessories  connecting cables  etc     Keep the back up battery away from children  If a child swallows the battery  consult a  physician immediately   Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines      When disposing of a battery pack or back up battery  insulate the electrical contacts  with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries  This is to prevent  fire or an explosion                    If excessive heat  smoke  or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging   immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging  and prevent a fire        If the battery pack or back up battery leaks  changes color  deforms  or emits smoke or  fumes  remove it immediately  Be careful not to get burned in the process    Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes  skin  and clothing  It can  cause blindness or skin problems  If the battery leakage contacts your eyes  skin  or  clothing  flush the affected area with lots of clean water without ru
106. atically rotated during playback  on both the camera   s LCD monitor and on the computer        e  On    _   The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the  computer    e  Off    The vertical image is not automatically rotated    2 FAQ    e The vertical image is not rotated during the image review  immediately after it is captured   Press the  lt   gt   gt  button and the image playback will display the  rotated image        Ont     is set  but the image does not rotate during playback   Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while  Auto  rotate  was set to  Off   If the vertical image is taken while the camera  is pointed up or down  the image might not be rotated automatically for  playback  In such a case  see    Rotating the Image    on page 205     e  On the camera   s LCD monitor    want to rotate an image    captured when  On  had been set   Set  On 6      then playback the image  It will be rotated     e  The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen   The software used is not compatible with image rotation  Use the  software provided with the camera instead     174    Handy Features       INFO  Checking Camera Settings    While the shooting settings  p 47  are displayed  press the  lt INFO  gt   button to display the camera   s major function settings           Settings display    Freespace 1 90 GB Card remaining capacity   Color space sRGB Color space  p 121    WB Shift BKT 0 0  0 WB correction  p 119     Live View shoot  Enable
107. bbing it  See a  physician immediately     During the recharging  keep the equipment away from the reach of children  The cord  can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock       Do not leave any cords near a heat source  It can deform the cord or melt the  insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock       Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car  It may cause an accident                      Do not fire the flash near a person   s eyes  It may impair the person   s vision  When  using flash to photograph an infant  keep at least 1 meter away       Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use  remove the battery pack and    disconnect the power plug  This is to prevent electrical shock  heat generation  and  fire             Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas  This is to prevent an  explosion or fire     297         If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts  do  not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock       Do not disassemble or modify the equipment  High voltage internal parts can cause  electrical shock       Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens   Doing so may damage your vision       Keep the camera from the reach of small children  The neck strap can accidentally  choke the child       Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places  This is to prevent fire and  electrical shock       Before usi
108. be too saturated with no detail  By  checking the image   s RGB histogram  you can see the color   s saturation  and gradation condition and white balance inclination     228    Sample Histograms          Normal brightness       Post Processing  Images    After shooting  you can apply Creative filters or resize  the images  downsize the pixel count      Q    t may not be possible to process images shot with a different  camera     Post processing images as described in this chapter cannot be  done while the camera is connected to a personal computer  via the  lt DIGITAL  gt  terminal        Q Creative Filters mua    You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a  new image  Grainy B W  Soft focus  Fish eye effect  Toy camera effect   and Miniature effect        E  1 Select  Creative filters      peni e Under the  2  tab  select  Creative  one filters   then press  lt   gt      Print order  gt  The images will be displayed   Creative filters    Resize    2 Select an image     Select the image you want to apply a  filter to     By pressing the  lt  3 Q  gt  button  you  can switch to the index display and  select an image     3 Select a filter     When you press  lt   gt   the Creative  filters will be displayed   G   For details on Creative filter  Ministurereffect   characteristics  see page 232   4 2    offs   Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select a filter   then press  lt   gt     gt    The image applied with the respective  filter will be disp
109. camera to the left or right quickly  high speed panning   or shoot a moving subject  the image may look distorted     No image appears on the TV screen     e  Make sure the AV cable or HDMI cable   s plug is inserted all the way in   p 218  221       Set the video OUT system  NTSC PAL  to the same video system as  the TV set  p 221      My card reader does not recognize the card       Depending on the card reader and computer OS used  SDXC cards  might not be correctly recognized  In such a case  connect your  camera to the computer with the provided interface cable  then  transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility  provided  software  p 302      Display Problems    The menu screen shows few tabs and options        e  In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode  certain tabs and  menu options are not displayed  Set the shooting mode to a Creative  Zone mode  p 43     The file name   s first character is an underscore     _MG_         e Set the color space to sRGB  If Adobe RGB is set  the first character  will be an underscore  p 121      285    Troubleshooting Guide   E E     The file name starts with    MVI _           Itis a movie file  p 171      The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect       The correct date and time has not been set  p 34      The date and time is not in the picture       The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture  The date  and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting  information  When printing  you
110. card format screen might be smaller  than the capacity indicated on the card     This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft     46    Switching the LCD Monitor Display sx    The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen  menu  screen  captured images  etc     Shooting Settings   At Scene Intelligent Auto   When you turn on the power switch   R the shooting settings will be displayed   AF  brightness  flash   color tone are set   When you press the shutter button  according to scene halfway  the display will turn off     And when you let go of the shutter  button  the display will turn on     e You can also turn off the display by  pressing the  lt DISP  gt  button  Press  the button again to turn on the display    e Pressing the  lt INFO  gt  button toggles  between the shooting settings screen   p 20  and camera settings screen   p 175            Menu Functions Captured Image    Quality aL  Beep Enable  Release shutter without card    Image review 2 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct   Red eye reduc  Disable         Appears when you press the e Appears when you press the   lt MENU gt  button  Press the  lt   gt   gt  button  Press the button  button again to return to the again to return to the shooting  shooting settings screen  settings screen     F e You can set       LCD off on btn  so that the shooting settings display  does not keep turning off and on  p 179      Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed  pressing  the sh
111. case of  Sunset  for example  warm colors will  become prominent so the ambience you set might not work well     F If you don   t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting  functions  press the  lt  Q  gt  button after step 1  Pressing the  lt  Q  gt  button will  display the Quick Control screen  You can then set  Shoot by lighting or  scene type  and shoot with the viewfinder     69    Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type  SSS Se    Lighting or Scene Type Settings    1  Default setting  The default setting     2  Daylight  For subjects under sunlight  Gives more natural looking blue skies  and greenery and reproduces light colored flowers better     3  Shade  For subjects in the shade  Suitable for skin tones  which may look  too bluish  and for light colored flowers     4  Cloudy  For subjects under overcast skies  Makes skin tones and  landscapes  which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day  look  warmer  Also effective for light colored flowers     5  Tungsten light  For subjects lit under tungsten lighting  Reduces the reddish orange  color cast caused by tungsten lighting     6  Fluorescent light  For subjects under fluorescent lighting  Suited for all types of  fluorescent lighting     7  Sunset  Suitable when you want to capture the sunset   s impressive colors     70      gt   Image Playback iu    The easiest way to playback images is explained below  For more  details on the playback procedure  see page 201     1 Playback the image     When you press the  
112. celing AEB    e  Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB amount display    e  The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power  switch is set to  lt OFF gt   flash recycling is completed  etc    X  Shooting Tips   e Using AEB with continuous shooting   If  lt Qy gt  continuous shooting  p 88  has been set and you press the  shutter button completely  the three bracketed shots will be taken  continuously in this sequence  Standard exposure  decreased  exposure  and increased exposure     e Using AEB with  lt  gt  single shooting   Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed  shots  The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following  sequence  Standard exposure  decreased exposure  and increased  exposure     e Using AEB with the self timer or remote control  sold  separately    With the self timer or remote control   lt j    gt  or  lt   2 gt    you can take  three continuous shots after a 10 sec  or 2 sec  delay  With  lt Wc gt    p 89  set  the number of continuous shots will be three times the  number set     Q   Neither flash nor bulb exposures can be used with AEB   e If    Auto Lighting Optimizer   p 109  is set to any setting other than   Disable   the AEB   s effect might be minimal     106      Locking the Exposure    ma    You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from  the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at  the same exposure setting  Press the  lt   gt  button to 
113. ct  lt Q gt   then press  lt    gt    E  Photo Cancel e Set as desired  then press  lt   gt    EJ Borderless Print  big 30n 6 Set the number of copies   Ey            Both      Set as necessary   W  1 Scopies    Tamra e Select  lt Q gt   then press  lt   gt    ri    PERENA a   Set the number of copies  then press    E  Photo Cancel  lt      gt    Borderless Print     e  amp 90n 7 Start printing   ma Se    Both e Select  Print   then press  lt  gt        D r  An D 1 copies  Trimming    Aa        RJ 9x13cm Paper settings  E  Photo Cancel  EJ Borderless Print       Fl e With Easy printing  you can print another image using the same settings   Just select the image and press the  lt     gt  button  With Easy printing  the  number of copies will always be 1   You cannot set the number of  copies   Also  any trimming  p 243  will not be applied    e The  Default  setting for printing effects and other options are the a  printer s own default settings as set by the printer   s manufacturer  See  the printer   s instruction manual to find out what the  Default  settings are    e Depending on the image   s file size and image recording quality  it may  take some time for the printing to start after you select  Print     e  f image tilt correction  p 243  has been applied  it may take longer to  print the image    e To stop the printing  press  lt  Ge   gt  while  Stop  is displayed  then select   OK     e  f you execute  Clear all camera settings   p 176   all the settings will  rever
114. ctly  having it done by a Canon  Service Center is recommended    Before cleaning the sensor  detach the lens from the camera        1 Select  Sensor cleaning      LCD brightness   Under the       tab  select  Sensor  LCD off on btn Shutter btn  Date Time 28 02  11 13 30  Languageda English  Video system PAL    cleaning   then press  lt   gt         Sensor cleaning 2 Select  Clean manually    Auto cleaning Enable   Select  Clean manually   then press  Clean nowt    lt    gt         Clean manually       Clean manually 3 Select  OK     e Select  OK   then press  lt   gt   E  Mirror will go up   gt  In a moment  the reflex mirror will  Clean the sensor  lockup and the shutter will open     Cancel       A Clean the sensor     5 End the cleaning     Set the power switch to  lt OFF gt      Fl e  For the power source  using AC Adapter Kit ACK E8  sold separately  is  recommended       f you use a battery  make sure it is fully recharged  If the battery grip with  size AA LR6 batteries is attached  manual sensor cleaning will not be  possible     187    TEW Manual Sensor Cleaning    ie Ml U lM MMM MULU     Q e While cleaning the sensor  never do any of the following  If the  power is cut off  the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and  image sensor might get damaged    e Setting the power switch to  lt OFF gt       Opening the battery compartment cover   e Opening the card slot cover      The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate  Clean the sensor  with care    e
115. dard  exposure  This metering mode is for advanced users   CI Center weighted average metering  m oo The brightness is metered at the center and  K  4 then averaged for the entire scene  This  a metering mode is for advanced users   F With  8   the exposure setting will be locked when you press the shutter       button halfway and focus is achieved  With K  CJ  and CJ  the exposure  setting is set at the moment of exposure   The exposure setting is not locked  when you press the shutter button halfway      102    Setting Exposure Compensation   mam    Avid Setting Exposure Compensation    Set exposure compensation if the exposure  without flash  does not come out  as desired  This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes  except  lt M gt     You can set the exposure compensation up to  5 stops in 1 3 stop increments        Making it brighter   Hold down the  lt Avi4 gt  button and  turn the  lt   gt  dial to the right    Increased exposure    Making it darker   Hold down the  lt Avi4 gt  button and  turn the  lt   7   gt  dial to the left    P 1 125 F56 400  Decreased exposure        p3  2  1  0  1  2 73         gt  As shown in the figure  the exposure   ag eet so fe level is displayed on the LCD monitor  and in the viewfinder    e After taking the picture  cancel the   1 125 F11 400 exposure compensation by setting   it back to 0        Decreased exposure for a darker image          Increased exposure for a brighter image       Dark exposure    F   The exposure compensatio
116. ded  With manual exposures  a slow shutter  speed may solve the problem     283    Troubleshooting Guide    SSS SS  Playback Problems    The LCD monitor does not display a clear image       Ifthe LCD monitor is dirty  use a soft cloth to clean it     In low or high temperatures  the LCD monitor display may seem slow  or might look black  It will return to normal at room temperature     Part of the image blinks in black       Itis the highlight alert  p 228   Overexposed highlight areas with a loss  of highlight detail will blink     The image cannot be erased     e Ifthe image has been protected  it cannot be erased  p 222      The movie cannot play       Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided  ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser  p 302  or other software cannot be  played with the camera  However  video snapshot albums edited with  ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser can be played on the camera     When the movie is played  camera operation noise can be  heard   e If you operate the camera   s dials or lens during movie shooting  the    operation noise will also be recorded  Use an external microphone   commercially available   p 160      The movie has still moments     e During autoexposure movie shooting  if there is a drastic change in the  exposure level  the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness  stabilizes  If this happens  use manual exposure  p 144      Troubleshooting Guide    The subject looks distorted during movie shooting     e If you move the 
117. e  AF       Manual focusing  Metering timer  Possible shots     Quick Control  Quick mode  AF      Long exposure noise reduction     253  Long exposures  Low level format                     M  Manual exposure               0  99  Macro photography  Magnified view  Malfunction  Manual exposure  Manual focus  MF   Manual reset                   Manual selection  AF                e 85  Maximum burst               00000ee 76 77  Medium  Image recording   quality        Memory card                Setting procedure  Settings            Metering timer     MF  Manual focusing               87  138  Microphone  Miniature effect     Mirror lockup  Mode Dial  Monochrome                                    Autoexposure    Editing out first and last  scenes  Enjoying    File size  Frame rate  Grid display     Information display  Manual exposure  Manual focusing    Metering timer  Movie digital zoom  Movie recording size   Playback  Quick Control  Recording time  Sound recording    Still photo shooting   Video snapshots          Video snapshots album  View on TV          Index    My Memu          eceeeseeseeseeeeeseeteeee 258  Ne  tral niivisi reret  Night Portrait   Night scene       Norai a a eee 170   Noise reduction  High ISO speed  Long exposures    Nomenclature                        Partial metering  Peripheral illumination    eelan e 11a  a AERAN REEERE EA  Personal white balance  PictBridge        Playback  Portrait  Possible shots     Power  Auto power off  Battery check      H
118. e  lt   gt  button to raise the  built in flash     e For wireless flash shooting  be sure  to raise the built in flash        2 Select  Flash control    Quality e  Under the  A  tab  select  Flash  Beep  Release shutter without card control   then press  lt   gt    Image review 2 sec        Peripheral illumin  correct   Red eye reduc  Disable  Flash control    Flash control 3 Select  Evaluative    Flash firing Enable e  For  E TTL Il meter    select  E TTL Il meter  Evaluative  Evaluative   then press  lt   gt      Built in flash func  setting  External flash func  setting  External flash C Fn setting  Clear ext  flash C Fn set        191    Easy Wireless Flash Shooting  baa See SS SSS SSeS SSS    Flash control A Select  Built in flash func     Flash firing Enable setting    E TTL II meter  Evaluative ers    Built in flash func  setting e Select  Built in flash func  setting      External flash func  setting then press  lt  Ge   gt    External flash C Fn setting       Built in flash func  setting 5 Select  EasyWireless    Built in flash EasyWireless MW    e For  Built in flash   select   EasyWireless   then press  lt   gt      Channel    Built in flash func  setting 6 Set  Channel      e  Set the channel  1 4  to the same one  as the slave unit   Channel    7 Take the picture   e As with normal flash shooting  you  can set the camera and take the  picture in the same way     Built in flash func  setting 8 Exit the wireless flash shooting   Built in flash __NormalFiring e For
119. e Error  The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge  Images taken with a  different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable     244     gt  Digital Print Order Format  DPOF  mam    You can set the print type  date imprinting  and file No  imprinting  The  print settings will be applied to all print ordered images   They cannot  be set individually for each image         Setting the Printing Options    F  1 Select  Print order        images e  Under the  T  tab  select  Print  ie eae  order   then press  lt   gt    Print order  Creative filters  Resize       Print order 2 Select  Set up    O Standard 0 prints e Select  Set up   then press  lt G gt         Date Off  File No  off    Sel lmage By fa All image    Set up  MENU a     3 Set the option as desired     Set the  Print type    Date   and  File  No       Select the option to be set  then press   lt   gt   Select the desired setting   then press  lt   gt       Print type   Date   File No      Print order Print order Print order  Set up Set up Set up    Print type    Standard  Index On    File No        245     gt  Digital Print Order Format  DPOF   a Ss                                     Standard  Prints one image on one sheet     Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet   Print type     Both Prints both the standard and index prints   On   F    Date Off  On  imprints the recorded date on the print   N On   g   f  File number Of  On  imprints the file No  on the print        
120. e camera shoots continuously    while you hold down the shutter    7   amp      Sy    een Se button completely        X  Shooting Tips  e Also set the AF mode  p 83  matching the subject   e For a moving subject  When Al Servo AF is set  focusing will be continuous during  continuous shooting   e For still subjects  When One Shot AF is set  the camera will focus only once during  continuous shooting        Flash can also be used   Since the flash will require recycling time  the continuous shooting  speed will be slower     Q e Under       Custom Functions  C Fn    if  5  High ISO speed noise  reduction   p 254  is set to  2  Strong   the maximum continuous  shooting burst will greatly decrease      In Al Servo AF mode  the continuous shooting speed may become  slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used      The continuous shooting speed might also decrease indoors and under  low light     88       Using the Self timer mE    1 Press the  lt  lt  2ijw gt  button        Select the self timer      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt  2  gt  dial to select the desired self   timer  then press  lt  6 gt     Drive mode i   10 sec  self timer   Self timer  10sec Remote control The remote control can also be   oq  HO  O2 Wc used   p 261    2   2 sec  self timer    p 122   Wc   10 sec  self timer plus  continuous shots  Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to set the  number of continuous shots  2 to  10  to be taken with the self timer    Take the picture      Look thr
121. e image display     Single shooting  Single point AF 85  Slide show  Small  Image recording  NY  oases tees anaes taceaddendee  Soft focus      Software                           System map        Temperature warning              Tone priority     Toning effect  Monochrome   Toy camera effect  Trimming  printing   Tripod socket   Tv  Shutter priority AE       USB  Digital  terminal                  236  Vari Angle LCD monitor             31  54  Video snapshot  Video snapshot album                             Video system     150  221  272  View on TV 210  218  Viewfinder    Dioptric adjustment       Volume  Movie playback               213    WB  White balance    White balance     Bracketing   Correction               Wind filter    Wireless flash shooting       Custom wireless shooting i  Easy wireless shooting              191    325    Q          Canon    CANON INC   30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome  Ohta ku  Tokyo 146 8501  Japan    Europe  Africa  amp  Middle East    CANON EUROPA N V   PO Box 2262  1180 EG Amstelveen  The Netherlands    For your local Canon office  please refer to your warranty card or to www canon europe com Support    The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N V        The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of  January 2011  For information on the camera   s compatibility with any lenses and  accessories introduced after this date  contact any Canon Service Center           
122. e number  then select  OK      To resize another image  repeat steps       Save as new file  Cancel OK 2 to 4     e To exit and return to the menu  press  the  lt MENU gt  button     233    E5 Resize    Resize Options According to Original Image Size                                     Onlainal nage cies Available Resize Settings  M s1 S2  3  L O O O O  M O O O  s1 O O  S2      3          About Image Sizes    Images such as the  8 0M 3456x2304  image size displayed in step 3   p 233  have a 3 2 aspect ratio  The image size according to aspect  ratios is shown in the table below  The asterisked image recording  quality figures do not exactly match the aspect ratio  The image will be  slightly cropped                                      Qualit Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count  Approx    uali  y 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1  M 3456x2304 3072x2304 3456x1944 2304x2304   8 0 megapixels     7 0 megapixels     6 7 megapixels     5 3 megapixels   s1 2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456  1728x1728   4 5 megapixels     4 0 megapixels     3 8 megapixels     3 0 megapixels   s2 1920x1280 1696x1280  1920x1080 1280x1280   2 5 megapixels     2 2 megapixels     2 1 megapixels     1 6 megapixels   53 720x480 640x480 720x400  480x480   350 000 pixels     310 000 pixels     290 000 pixels     230 000 pixels        234          11    Printing Images    e Printing  p 236   You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print  out the images in the card  The camera is compatible with      A PictBridge    which is 
123. e printer  you can easily  print images with DPOF     Sel Image Byas All image       Set up Print  MENU ka        1 Prepare to print       See page 236  Follow the    Connecting the Camera to a Printer     procedure up to step 5     2 Under the  H  tab  select  Print order      3 Select  Print      e  Print  will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a  printer and printing is possible     4 Set the  Paper settings   p 238      Set the printing effects  p 240  if necessary   5 Select  OK      Q e Before printing  be sure to set the paper size     Certain printers cannot imprint the file No   e  f  Bordered  is set  certain printers might imprint the date on the border   e  Depending on the printer  the date might look light if it is imprinted on a  bright background or on the border     Fl   Under  Adjust levels    Manual  cannot be selected        f you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining  images  select  Resume   Note that printing will not resume if you stop  the printing and any of the following occurs      Before resuming the printing  you changed the print order or deleted  print ordered images       When you set the index  you changed the paper setting before  resuming the printing    e When you paused the printing  the card   s remaining capacity was low        f a problem occurs during printing  see page 244     248    12    Customizing the  Camera    You can customize various camera features to suit your  picture taking preferenc
124. e shooting  press the  lt E   gt  button    e By holding down the  lt Avi4 gt  button and turning the  lt   gt  dial  you can  set the exposure compensation    e Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed  aperture   and ISO speed  p 146  on the screen   s bottom  This is the exposure  setting for taking a still photo      On the shooting information display  p 227   if you playback a movie shot  with autoexposure  the shutter speed and aperture will not be displayed   The image information  Exif  will record the settings used at the start of m  the movie shooting     Using an EX series Speedlite  Sold Separately  Equipped with  a LED Light    This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light  automatically in low light conditions during autoexposure shooting  For  details  see the EX series Speedlite   s instruction manual     143           Shooting Movies       Manual Exposure Shooting    You can manually set the shutter speed  aperture  and ISO speed for  movie shooting  Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for  advanced users        Me   1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt        gt      CID  gt  The reflex mirror will make a sound   LG then the image will appear on the  LCD monitor   I 2 Select  Movie exposure    Movie exposure Auto   Press the  lt MENU gt  button and under        AF mode Live mode      AF w  shutter button during     the  Com   tab  select  Movie     mShutter AE lock button exposure   then press  lt   gt      3 Select  
125. e simultaneous recording possible   L  Large    Approx  17 90 megapixels  5184 x 3456   M  Medium    Approx  8 00 megapixels  3456 x 2304   S1  Small 1   Approx  4 50 megapixels  2592 x 1728   S2  Small 2   Approx  2 50 megapixels  1920 x 1280   S3  Small 3    Approx  350 000 pixels  720 x 480   RAW   Approx  17 90 megapixels  5184 x 3456     e Image Processing During Shooting    Picture Style     Basict   White balance     Noise reduction   Automatic image  brightness correction   Highlight tone priority   Lens peripheral  illumination correction     288    Auto  Standard  Portrait  Landscape  Neutral  Faithful   Monochrome  User Def  1   3   Shoot by ambience selection  Shoot by lighting or scene type  Auto  Preset  Daylight  Shade  Cloudy  Tungsten light   White fluorescent light  Flash   Custom   White balance correction and white balance bracketing  features provided     Flash color temperature information communication provided  Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots    Auto Lighting Optimizer  Provided    Provided    Specifications    e Viewfinder   Type  Eye level pentamirror   Coverage  Vertical Horizontal approx  95   with Eye point approx  19 mm    Magnification  Approx  0 85x   1 m     with 50mm lens at infinity    Eye point  Approx  19 mm  From eyepiece lens center at  1 m       Built in dioptric adjustment  Approx   3 0    1 0 m     dpt    Focusing screen  Fixed  Precision Matte   Mirror  Quick return type   Depth of field preview  Provided   e Au
126. e the filter effect more pronounced     By applying a toning effect  you can  create a monochrome image in that  color  It can make the image look more  impressive    The following can be selected   N None     S Sepia    B Blue    P Purple  or   G Green         313  Registering Preferred Image Characteristics   ma    You can select a base Picture Style such as  Portrait  or  Landscape    adjust its parameters as desired and register it under  User Def  1     User Def  2   or  User Def  3     You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as  sharpness and contrast are different  You can also adjust the  parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera  with EOS Utility  provided software  p 302      1 Press the  lt V 313 gt  button     SET 2 Select  User Def       User Def 1 Auto    Select  User Def      then press the  M ainh bun ads A  lt INFO  gt  button     gt  The Detail set  screen will appear         INFO  Detail set     3 Press  lt   gt    e With  Picture Style  selected  press    OSharpness  OContrast       gt      Saturation    Color tone       CE M  Select the base Picture Style     Eictorestyie Landscape mE e Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the  base Picture Style  then press  lt   gt     e To adjust the parameters of a Picture  Style which has been registered to  the camera with EOS Utility  provided  software   select the Picture Style  here        115    22  Registering Preferred Image Characteristics      Detail set  321 
127. e up to   10 degrees in 0 5 degree increments  When you adjust the  image tilt  the  lt   amp   gt  icon on the screen will turn blue     3 Press  lt   gt  to exit the trimming    gt  The print setting screen will reappear     You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the  print setting screen     243    A Printing    Q   Depending on the printer  the trimmed image area might not be printed  as you specified     The smaller you make the trimming frame  the grainier the picture will  look in the print     While trimming the image  look at the camera   s LCD monitor  If you look  at the image on a TV screen  the trimming frame might not be displayed  accurately     Gl Handling Printer Errors  If you resolve a printer error  no ink  no paper  etc   and select  Continue  to  resume printing but it does not resume  operate the buttons on the printer to  resume printing  For details on resuming the printing  see the printer   s  instruction manual     Error Messages   If a problem occurs during printing  an error message will appear on the  camera   s LCD monitor  Press  lt Ge  gt  to stop printing  After fixing the  problem  resume printing  For details on how to fix a printing problem  refer  to the printer   s instruction manual     Paper Error  Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer   Ink Error  Check the printer   s ink level  and check the waste ink tank   Hardware Error  Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems   Fil
128. ec     94    Tv  Action Shots  iE ee    X   Shooting Tips    e To freeze the action or moving subject   Use a fast shutter speed such as 1 4000 sec  to 1 500 sec        To blur a running child or animal giving the impression of fast  movement   Use a medium shutter speed such as 1 250 sec  to 1 30 sec  Follow  the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter  button to take the picture  If you use a telephoto lens  hold it steady  to prevent camera shake     e How to blur a flowing river or water fountain  E  Use a slow shutter speed of 1 30 sec  or slower  Use a tripod to  prevent hand held camera shake       Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not  blink   If you press the shutter button halfway and change  the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed   the aperture display will also change to maintain the  same exposure  amount of light reaching the image  sensor   If you exceed the adjustable aperture  range  the aperture display will blink to indicate that  the standard exposure cannot be obtained   If the exposure will be too dark  the maximum aperture  smallest  number  will blink  If this happens  turn the  lt s   gt  dial to the left to  set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed   If the exposure will be too bright  the minimum aperture  highest  number  will blink  If this happens  turn the  lt s   gt  dial to the right to  set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed        4 Using the Built in Flash    To 
129. ecome noticeable       f you take the picture during magnified view  the exposure might not  come out as desired  Return to the normal view before taking the picture   During the magnified view  the shutter speed and aperture will be  displayed in orange  Even if you take the picture during magnified view   the image will be captured in the normal view    e If     Auto Lighting Optimizer   p 109  is not set to  Disable   the  image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or  decreased flash exposure compensation has been set        f you use a TS E lens for shifting or tilting the lens or use an Extension  Tube  the standard exposure might not be obtained or an irregular  exposure may result     Custom Function Cautions   e During Live View shooting  certain Custom Function settings will not take  effect  p 251     Lens and Flash Cautions     The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used     e FE lock is not possible when the built in flash or an external Speedlite is  used  Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite     140    Shooting Movies    Set the Mode Dial to  lt     gt  to  shoot movies  The movie  recording format will be MOV        Q Cards which can record movies  When shooting movies  use a large capacity SD card rated SD  Speed Class 6    cLass     or higher   If you use a slow writing card when shooting movies  the movie  might not be recorded properly  And if you playback a movie on a  card having a slow readin
130. ection and Al Servo AF  p 84    The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject  During  autofocusing  if the subject moves away from the center AF point   focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by  another AF point     AF Assist Beam with the Built in Flash    Under low light conditions  when you press the shutter button halfway   the built in flash fires a brief burst of flashes  It illuminates the subject to  enable easier autofocusing     F e The AF assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes    lt    gt    lt     gt  and  lt 4  gt      The AF assist beam cannot be emitted in the Al Servo AF mode     The effective range of the AF assist beam emitted by the built in flash is  about 4 meters 13 1 feet   e In Creative Zone modes when you raise the built in flash with the  lt    gt   button  p 90   the AF assist beam will be fired when necessary     F If you use an Extender  sold separately  and the maximum aperture  becomes smaller than f 5 6  AF shooting will not be possible  except in  Live  mode  and   Live mode  during Live View shooting   For details  see the  Extender   s instruction manual     86    Subjects Difficult to FOCUS mE    Autofocus can fail to achieve focus  viewfinder   s focus confirmation light   lt   gt  blinks  with certain subjects such as the following     Very low contrast subjects    Example  Blue sky  solid color walls  etc      Subjects in very low light  e Extremely backlit or reflective subjects
131. ed with printers compatible only with CP Direct  or Bubble Jet Direct   e Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided      If there is a long beeping sound in step 5  it indicates a problem with the  printer  Resolve the problem displayed by the error message  p 244   a    Fl    You can also print RAW images taken with this camera    e  f you use a battery pack to power the camera  make sure it is fully  charged  With a fully charged battery  printing up to about 4 hours is  possible    e Before disconnecting the cable  first turn off the camera and printer  Hold  the plug  not the cord  to pull out the cable    e For direct printing  using AC Adapter Kit ACK E8  sold separately  to  power the camera is recommended     237    AC Printing m    The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the  printer  Some settings might not be available  For details  see the  printer   s instruction manual        Printer connected icon 1 Select the image to be printed    s   Check that the  lt   gt  icon is  displayed on the upper left of the LCD  monitor      Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select the  image to be printed         Borderless       Press  lt    gt     gt  The print setting screen will appear     Print setting screen Sets the printing effects  p 240      Sets the date or file number imprinting to on  or off                 a  2  Off  ii Qy 1 copies Sets the quantity to be printed   Trimming Sets the trimming  cropping   p 243     49x13cm Pape
132. editing  select      and  press  lt   gt      A Save the movie    e Select   2   then press  lt   gt      gt  The save screen will appear    e To save it as a new movie  select   New file   To save it and overwrite  the original movie file  select   Overwrite   Then press  lt   gt            Fl   Since the editing is done in 1 sec  increments  position indicated by  X     the exact  position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified     If the card does not have enough room   New file  will not be selectable     More movie editing functions are available with ZoomBrowser EX   ImageBrowser  provided software  p 302      214    mam Slide Show  Auto Playback  maa    You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show     E  1 Select  Slide show    Histogram Brightness e Under the   1   tab  select  Slide  show   then press  lt   gt      Image jump w e Mm  Slide show    Number of images to be played 2 Select the images to be played           Slide show   Press the  lt  AY  gt  key to select the                                                       7  46 images desired option  then press  lt   gt    AII images   P A   All images Movies Stills        up   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select one of  are the following   AII images   boe    Movies   4 Stills   Then press  Select date  lt      gt    28 02 2011 102 0001    01 03 2011 Mal  Date Folder Rating   Dinei _    e Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select one of  Select folder the f
133. eed     e Aslow shutter speed has been set   Use a tripod to steady the camera    e   want to use flash   Flash can be used  however  the result will be the same as using the   lt P gt  mode with flash  The desired depth of field will not be obtained     101       Changing the Metering Mode   mau    Four methods  metering modes  to measure the subject   s brightness  are provided  Normally  evaluative metering is recommended   In Basic Zone modes  evaluative metering is set automatically        a  1 Select  Metering mode    Expo comp  AEB_ 2  1     1 22 e Under the  G   tab  select  Metering    Auto Lighting Optimizer  Metering mode fr  mode   then press  lt   gt      Metering mode Set the metering mode   e  Select the desired metering mode   then press  lt  gt         Evaluative metering    OR A a cE                                                                                           Evaluative metering  fe This is an all around metering mode suited for  EET e portraits and even backlit subjects  The camera    sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene    amp   Partial metering  1 A a Effective when the background is much brighter  ee    Lae than the subject due to backlighting  etc  The gray  2 area in the left figure is where the brightness is  metered to obtain the standard exposure   CI Spot metering  PS This is for metering a specific part of the subject or  he a scene  The gray area in the left figure is where the  2 brightness is metered to obtain the stan
134. een set  single shooting will take effect      f 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up  it will go back down  automatically  Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the  mirror again     122    Shooting with the LCD Monitor   Live View Shooting     You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera   s  LCD monitor  This is called    Live View shooting        Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do  not move    If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the  LCD monitor  camera shake can cause blurred images   Using a tripod is recommended     F About Remote Live View Shooting  With EOS Utility  provided software  p 302  installed in your  computer  you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot  remotely while viewing the computer screen  For details  see the  PDF Software Instruction Manual  p 305  on the CD ROM        C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor ma       1 Display the Live View image   e Press the  lt  gt  button    gt  The Live View image will appear on  the LCD monitor     The Live View image will closely  reflect the brightness level of the  actual image you capture     2 Focus the subject     When you press the shutter button  halfway  the camera will focus with  the current AF mode  p 131 137      3 Take the picture    T   Press the shutter button completely     gt  The picture will be taken and the  captured image is displayed on the  LCD monitor     gt  After the image review ends  the  camera will ret
135. effect   e In bright outdoors  the Live View image you see on the screen might not  have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo  Set       LCD brightness  to 4 and look at the Live View image while the  screen is unaffected by stray light     Fl If you don   t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting  functions  press the  lt  Q  gt  button after step 1  When you press the  lt  Q  gt   button  the Quick Control screen is displayed and you can set  Shoot by  ambience selection  and  Shoot by lighting or scene   then shoot with    the viewfinder     66    Shoot by Ambience Selection    Ambience Settings     1  Standard setting  Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode   Note that  lt    gt  has image characteristics geared for portraits and   lt    A  gt  is geared for landscapes  Each ambience is a modification of  the respective shooting mode   s image characteristics     2  Vivid  The subject will look sharp and vivid  It makes the photo look more fa  impressive than with  Standard setting      3  Soft  The subject will look softer and more dainty  Good for portraits  pets   flowers  etc     4  Warm  The subject will look softer with warmer colors  Good for portraits   pets  and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look      5  Intense  While the overall brightness is slightly lowered  the subject is  emphasized for a more intense feeling  Makes the human or living  subject stand out more     6  Cool  The ov
136. effect is applied with a soft focus lens    A special effects filter is used     Q If you use AF with any of the following lenses  using  Quick mode  is  recommended  If you use the  Live mode  or   Live mode  for AF  it may  take a longer time to achieve focus or the camera may not be able to  achieve correct focus   EF 28mm    2 8  EF 35mm f 2  EF 50mm f 1 4 USM  EF 50mm f 1 8 Il   EF 50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro  EF 135mm f 2 8  Softfocus    EF 75 300mm f 4 5 6 Ill  EF 75 300mm f 4 5 6 III USM   For information on discontinued lenses  refer to your local Canon website     135    Changing the Autofocus Mode  e     Quick Mode  AMM    The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One Shot AF mode  p 83    using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting    Although you can focus the target area quickly  the Live View image  will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation     AF point 1 Display the Live View image   7   e Press the  lt  gt  button    gt  The Live View image will appear on  the LCD monitor     The small boxes on the screen are  the AF points  and the larger box is  as the magnifying frame       2 Select the AF point        Press the  lt  Q  gt  button  610  to  display the Quick Control screen     gt  The settable functions will be  displayed on the left of the screen      Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to make the AF  point selectable      Turn the  lt s   gt  dial to select the AF  point        Manual selection    136    Changing the Autofocus Mode         
137. eld AE     Changing the Metering Mode       Avid Setting Exposure Compensation       Auto Exposure Bracketing  AEB     Locking the Exposure  AE Lock  a       Locking the Flash Exposure  FE Lock  0    teteeeeees 108  Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically  Auto Lighting Optimizer         109  Correcting the Image   s Dark Corners  21  Customizing Image Characteristics  Picture Style     213 Registering Preferred Image Characteristics  Picture Style      we Matching the Light Source  White Balance       WB Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source     Setting the Color Reproduction Range  Color Space      Mirror Lock up to Reduce Camera Shake    5 Shooting with the LCD Monitor  Live View Shooting  123       Shooting with the LCD Monitor    124  Shooting Function Settings   128  Gli Menu Function Settings   129  Changing the Autofocus Mode    131  MF  Focusing Manually 138                                         11    Contents    6 Shooting Movies 141         Shooting Movies  Shooting Function Settings       Setting the Movie recording Size  Using Movie Digital Zoom  Taking Video Snapshots  Menu Function Settings    7 Handy Features 165    Handy Features  Silencing the Beeper     Card Reminder      Setting the Image Review Time    Setting the Auto Power off Time      Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness  Creating and Selecting a Folder  File Numbering Methods  Setting Copyright Information   Auto Rotation of Vertical Images     INFO  Checking Camera Settings   
138. ely  Recompose the picture and try to  focus again  Or see    Subjects Difficult to Focus     p 87        If  Gr Beep  is set to  Disable   the beeper will not sound when focus is  achieved     Al Servo AF for Moving Subjects    This AF mode is for moving subjects when the focusing distance  keeps changing  While you hold down the shutter button halfway   the subject will be focused continuously    e  The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken      When the AF point selection  p 85  is automatic  the camera first  uses the center AF point to focus  During autofocusing  if the subject  moves away from the center AF point  focus tracking continues as  long as the subject is covered by another AF point     Fil With Al Servo AF  the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved   Also  the focus confirmation light  lt   gt  in the viewfinder will not light     Al Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode    Al Focus AF switches the AF mode from One Shot AF to Al Servo   AF automatically if the still subject starts moving    e After the subject is focused in One Shot AF mode  if the subject  starts moving  the camera will detect the movement and change the  AF mode automatically to Al Servo AF     Fl When focus is achieved in the Al Focus AF mode with the Servo mode  active  the beeper will sound continuously sofltly  However  the focus  confirmation light  lt   gt  in the viewfinder will not light     84    Selecting the AF Point   memme    In Basic Zone modes  
139. ep the person within 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera   Under low light  the built in flash will fire automatically to obtain a  good exposure of the person  The maximum effective distance of the  built in flash is 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera        Shoot also with  lt   J  gt   Scene Intelligent Auto    Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots  shooting also  with  lt G   gt   Scene Intelligent Auto  is recommended     Al    Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires   e If you use the self timer together with flash  the self timer lamp will light  briefly after the picture is taken     63     Q  Quick Control m     Example  Portrait mode In Basic Zone modes when the shooting  settings screen is displayed  you can  press the  lt  Q  gt  button to display the  Quick Control screen  The table below  indicates the functions that can be set  with the Quick Control screen in each    Shoot by ambience selection Basic Zone mode           1 Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode     2 Press the  lt  Q  gt  button   610    gt  The Quick Control screen will appear     3 Set the function       Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select a function   Step not necessary in  the G J   mode      gt  The selected function and Feature guide  p 48  will be displayed    e Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the  lt   gt  dial to change the setting     Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes                                                       Set automatically O  
140. era   s  basic operations and shooting procedures        Introduction    d        Getting Started    53E       Basic Shooting and Image Playback    49       Creative Shooting    zg       Advanced Shooting    3       Shooting with the LCD Monitor  Live View Shooting     123 Ij       Shooting Movies    141       Handy Features    165 fj       Wireless Flash Photography    189 fj       Image Playback    201 B       Post Processing Images    229 fj       Printing Images    235 E       Pall Vv ONO Mi Alwin  e    Customizing the Camera    249 J       aN  w    Reference    259 E            A    Software Start Guide    301 B       oN  wi    Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index    307 E       5       Contents at a Glance                                     Shooting  e  Shoot automatically  gt  p 49   63  Basic Zone modes   e Shoot continuously  gt  p 88  Gi Continuous shooting     Take a picture of yourself ina group  gt  p 89     Self timer   e Freeze the action  gt  p 94  Tv Shutter priority AE   e Blur the action  e Blur the background  gt  p 56    Creative Auto     Keep the background in sharp focus p 96  Av Aperture priority AE     Adjust the image brightness  exposure   gt  p 103  Exposure compensation   e Shoot in low light  gt  p 50  90  4 Flash photography   p 79  ISO speed setting   e Shoot without flash  gt  p 55    Flash Off   p 58  64    Flash Off     Photograph fireworks at night  gt  p 100  Bulb exposure   e  Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor  gt  p 124 
141. erall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast  A  subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive      7  Brighter   The picture will look brighter    8  Darker   The picture will look darker    9  Monochrome    The picture will be monochrome  You can select the monochrome  color to be black and white  sepia  or blue  When  Monochrome  is  selected   lt B W gt  will appear in the viewfinder     67    Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type mu    In the  lt  gt   Portrait    lt    a  gt   Landscape    lt  gt   Close up   and  lt     gt    Sports  Basic Zone modes  you can shoot while the settings match the  lighting or scene type  Normally   Default setting  is adequate  but if the  settings match the lighting condition or scene  the picture will look more  accurate to your eye    For Live View shooting  if you set both  Shoot by lighting or scene  type  and  Shoot by ambience selection   p 65   you should first set   Shoot by lighting or scene type   This will make it easier to see the  resulting effect on the LCD monitor        Lighting or scene   G         g        1  Default setting   2  Daylight    3  Shade    4  Cloudy                      O  O  olol BF       5  Tungsten light       6  Fluorescent light       ol CO  CO  O  CO  OC  o       ojoj olol olol CO                                      O  O  CO  CO  CO  OF o    7  Sunset O       Set the Mode Dial to any of the  following modes   lt  gt    lt    a  gt     lt  gt   or  lt  amp   gt      Display the L
142. ers and symbols     4 Exit the setting   e After entering the text  press the   lt MENU gt  button to exit        172    Handy Features    Text Entry Procedure   e Changing the entry area   Press the  lt  Q  gt  button to toggle  between the top and bottom entry  areas     Enter author s name    XXXXX  XXXXX     e  Moving the cursor   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to move the  cursor        e Entering text   In the bottom area  press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key or turn the  lt  74  gt  dial to  select a character  then press  lt 7  gt  to enter it     e Deleting a character   Press the  lt   1 gt  button to delete one character     e Exiting   After entering the text  press the  lt MENU gt  button to finalize the text o  entry and return to the screen in step 2     e Canceling the text entry   To cancel the text entry  press the  lt INFO  gt  button and the screen in  step 2 will reappear     Fl You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility   provided software  p 302      173    Handy Features    E a SS SS     M Auto Rotation of Vertical Images    Vertical images are rotated automatically so they  are displayed vertically on the camera   s LCD  monitor and on the personal computer instead of  horizontally  The setting of this feature can be  changed           Under the       tab  select  Auto rotate     then press  lt   gt   The available settings   AutoTrorete are described below  Select one  then   press  lt   gt     e  Ong      The vertical image is autom
143. es with Custom Functions   Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative  Zone modes           mW Setting Custom Functions   ma    1 Select  Custom Functions  C Fn     Custom Functionst   Fa    Under the       tab  select  Custom  sehen Functions  C Fn    then press  lt   gt      Firmware Ver  1 0 0       Custom Function No  2 Select the Custom Function No        CFn I    Exposure a ih   Press the Are  key to select the  Exposure level increments Custom Function No   then press    0 1 3 stop  lt   gt    1 1 2 stop           C Fn I  Exposure 1 3 Change the setting as desired           mmm   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the  T 1 2 stop setting  number   then press  lt  gt      e Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to  set other Custom Functions    e At the bottom of the screen  the  current Custom Function settings are  indicated below the respective  function numbers     A Exit the setting     Press the  lt MENU gt  button    gt  The screen for step 1 will reappear     Clearing All Custom Functions    Under      Clear settings   select  Clear all Custom Func   C Fn   to  clear all the Custom Function settings  p 176      250    Setting Custom Functions    SS SS   8 8      Custom Functions                      C Fn I  Exposure Ca LV shooting  1   Exposure level increments O  2   ISO expansion p 252 O  3   Flash sync  speed in Av mode O                         C Fn Il  Image                                              4   Long exposure noise reduction p 253 O  5   
144. ess  lt   gt    aa Continuous When you exit the menu  the selected  Screen color color will be displayed for the shooting  settings screen   perem  P  1125 F56  100  P ams F8 0 200 73  2  1  0  1  2 23  Coo mfa E  oO a  me onesHot Cf  AL  ESET LAA fo   a  514        179    mW Setting the Flash    memm    The built in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the  camera   s menu  You can use the camera   s menu to set the external  Speedlite function settings only if the attached EX series Speedlite is  compatible with this function    The setting procedure is the same as setting a camera menu function       Select  Flash control      Quality aL   Under the  A  tab  select  Flash  Beep Enable    Release shutter without card control   then press  lt     gt     Image review 2 sec   gt  The flash control screen will appear   Peripheral illumin  correct    Red eye reduc  Disable   Flash control           Flash firing    Flash control   Normally  set this to  Enable     Flash firing Enable e If  Disable  is set  neither the built    ETL meter meen Evaluative in flash nor the external Speedlite   Built in flash func  setting are as   External flash func  setting will fire  This is useful when you only  want to use the flash   s AF assist  beam     E TTL Il Metering Modes    Flash control e For normal flash exposures  set this  to  Evaluative      Average  is for advanced users  As  with an external Speedlite  the  metering area is averaged  Flash  exposure compensation 
145. f the  following   on Protect images       Rotate    Xx Rating      Creative  filters      4 Resize  JPEG images only    and  4 Image jump w  743    For movies  only the functions in bold above can be set        Press the  lt  Q  gt  button    e During image playback  press the   lt  Q  gt  button     gt  The functions settable with Quick   Protecti ae Control will appear on the left of the  Disable Enable screen     2 Select a function and set it     Press the  lt  AF  gt  key to select a    function      gt  The name and current setting of the  Rating v selected function are displayed at the  oF CIZEJ R bottom          Set it by pressing the  lt   lt A    gt  key    e For Creative filters and Resize  press   lt   gt  and set the function  For  details  see page 230 for Creative  filters and page 233 for Resize  To  cancel  press the  lt MENU gt  button     3 Exit the setting     Press the  lt  Q  gt  button to turn off the    Quick Control icons and function  settings     Q To rotate an image  set     Auto rotate  to  Onis      If     Auto rotate  is  set to  On     or  Off   the     Rotate  setting will be recorded to the image   but the camera will not rotate the image for display     208                 Q  Quick Control During Playback  SSS a eS A a     Fl   Pressing the  lt  Q  gt  button during the index display will switch to the  single image display and the Quick Control icons will appear  Pressing  the  lt  Q  gt  button again will return to the index display    e 
146. f the picture will be too bright  the    4000     1 4000 sec   shutter  speed display will blink  If this happens  turn the  lt s   gt  dial to the  right to set a higher aperture f number or decrease the ISO speed        97    Av  Changing the Depth of Field      lt a Se SS 2      4 Using the Built in Flash    To obtain a correct flash exposure  the flash output will be set  automatically to match the set aperture  autoflash exposure   The  shutter speed will be set automatically between 1 200 sec    30 sec  to  suit the scene   s brightness    In low light  the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash  and  the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically   Both the subject and background look properly exposed  automatic  slow speed flash sync   If you are handholding the camera  keep it  steady to prevent camera shake  Using a tripod is recommended    If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be used  set  3  Flash sync   speed in Av mode  to  1  1 200 1 60 sec  auto  or  2  1 200 sec    fixed   in      Custom Functions  C Fn    p 252      Depth of Field Preview      The aperture opening  diaphragm  changes only at the moment when  the picture is taken  Otherwise  the aperture remains fully open   Therefore  when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or LCD  monitor  the depth of field will look narrow    J When you press the depth of field  preview button  you can see the actual  depth of field before you shoot            SEAN         
147. folder    Card 1 Card 2 Card 1    100 101   o   gt     gt      XXX 0051 XXX 0051 XX   0052  J  I    Next sequential file number                               170    Handy Features  EE E E E    e  Auto reset   The file numbering is reset to 0001 whenever you  replace the card or create a folder   Whenever the card is replaced or a new folder created  the file  numbering starts from 0001  This is convenient if you want to  organize images according to cards or folders   If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images  recorded previously  the file numbering of the new images might  continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or  folder  If you want to save images with the file numbering starting  from 0001  use a newly formatted card each time     File numbering after File numbering after  replacing the card creating a folder          Card 2 Card 1    100  LA   gt  LA  XXX 0051  0001  XXX 0051   0001  j   a a7    File numbering is reset                  e  Manual reset   To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or B  to start from file number 0001 in a new folder   When you reset the file numbering manually  a new folder is created  automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder  starts from 0001   This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images  taken yesterday and the ones taken today  for example   After the manual reset  the file numbering returns to continuous or  auto reset   There 
148. g  do not point the lens toward the sun  The  sun   s heat can damage the camera   s internal components   e Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 139 140     Fl e  When flash is used  there will be two shutter sounds  but only one shot  will be taken      If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period  the power will turn  off automatically as set with       Auto power off   p 167   If     Auto  power off  is set to  Off   the Live View function will terminate  automatically after 30 min   camera power remains on     e With the AV cable  provided  or HDMI cable  sold separately   you can  display the Live View image on a TV  p 218  221      125       Shooting with the LCD Monitor    About the Information Display    e Each time you press the  lt INFO  gt  button  the information display will  change     AF mode     AF point  Quick mode     AF   Live mode ini     AFL   Face detection Live mode Magnifying  tale     AQ   Quick mode Histogram    Shooting mode                     Drive mode  White balance oe  Auto Lighting me  Status  Optimizer I 2   FEB  Image recording     AEB  quality  Built in flash    Eye Fi card               2  FEB  AEB  Exposure  a      THEO See Es me emeccog simulation          function  AE lock Battery check   4 Flash ready Highlight tone     Flash off priority  Flash exposure ISO speed  compensation  zm  External flash exposure Possible shots  compensation    at       Exposure level indicator   Shutter speed           AEB range  Pictu
149. g MPEG 4 compliant video  that was encoded only  1  for a personal and non commercial purpose or  2  by a  video provider licensed under the AT amp T patents to provide MPEG 4 compliant video   No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG 4 standard        Notice displayed in English as required     Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended    This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with  genuine Canon accessories  Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this  product and or accidents such as fire  etc   caused by the malfunction of non   genuine Canon accessories  e g   a leakage and or explosion of a battery  pack   Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the  malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories  although you may request  such repairs on a chargeable basis     296    Safety Warnings    Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury  death   and material damage     Preventing Serious Injury or Death    To prevent fire  excessive heat  chemical leakage  and explosions  follow the   safeguards below      Do not use any batteries  power sources  and accessories not specified in this  booklet  Do not use any home made or modified batteries      Do not short circuit  disassemble  or modify the battery pack or back up battery  Do  not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back up battery  Do not expose  the battery pack or back up battery to fire or w
150. g speed  the movie might not playback  properly   To check the card   s read write speed  refer to the card  manufacturer   s Web site     El About Full HD 1080  Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High     Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels  scanning ee  lines             Shooting Movies mam    Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to playback the  movies shot  p 218  221      Autoexposure Shooting    VAPA 1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt     gt        gt  The reflex mirror will make a sound     J then the image will appear on the  LCD monitor     2 Focus the subject     Before shooting a movie  autofocus  or manual focus  p 131 138      When you press the shutter button  halfway  the camera will focus with  the current AF mode                 Shoot the movie    e Press the  lt   gt  button to start  shooting a movie  To stop movie  shooting  press  lt     gt  again     gt  While the movie is being shot  the          mark will be displayed on the  upper right of the screen                       142           Shooting Movies    Q e During movie shooting  do not point the lens toward the sun  The sun   s  heat can damage the camera   s internal components   e Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 163 and 164   e If necessary  also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages  139 and 140     Fl   The ISO speed  shutter speed  and aperture are set automatically    e AE lock is possible by pressing the  lt  gt  button  p 107   To cancel AE  lock during movi
151. g with access point       Displayed  Connected   Connection to access point  established       1  Transferring   Image transfer to access point in  progress     266    Using Eye Fi Cards  SEES SSS ee    Q Cautions for Using Eye Fi Cards     If     Q    is displayed  an error occurred while retrieving the card  information  Turn the camera   s power switch off and on again    e Even if  Eye Fi trans   is set to  Disable   it may still transmit a signal  In  hospitals  airports  and other places where wireless transmissions are  prohibited  remove the Eye Fi card from the camera      If the image transfer does not function  check the Eye Fi card and  personal computer settings  For details  see the card   s instruction  manual    e Depending on the wireless LAN   s connection conditions  the image  transfer may take longer or it might be interrupted    e  Because of the transmission function  the Eye Fi card may become hot    The battery power will be consumed faster   e During the image transfer  auto power off will not take effect     267    Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes m                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Set automatically O  User selectable   Not selectable  Basic Zone Creative Zone    Mode Dial 7 x  O  al  amp  ja B  P  Tv Av  M  A DEP  98  g  All di li  settings selec
152. ger need the image before erasing it  To prevent  important images from being erased accidentally  protect  them  Erasing a AM  AL image will erase both the HJ and  4L images     Erasing a Single Image                r CG 1 Playback the image to be erased   Wr   es  Li 2 Press the  lt    gt  button   cos oo j  gt  The erase dialog will appear at the  P  bottom of the screen           Erase the images     Select  Erase   then press  lt   gt   The  image displayed will be erased     Cancel Erase       Checkmarking  lt v  gt  Images to be Erased in a Batch    By checkmarking the images to be erased  you can erase multiple  images at one time     E  1 Select  Erase images      Protect images  e  Under the  T  tab  select  Erase  Rotate 5 h  gt   gt   Erase images images   then press  lt  gt      Print order  Creative filters  Resize       224    TI Erasing Images  EEE E      Erase images 2 Select  Select and erase images    Select and erase images   Select  Select and erase images    All images in folder   All images on card then press  lt 6   gt      gt  The images will be displayed    e To display the three image display   press the  lt f3 Q  gt  button  To return to  the single image display  press the   lt   gt  button        3 Select the images to be erased      Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select the  image to be erased  then press the   lt  AV  gt  key     gt  A lt v gt  checkmark will be displayed  on the upper left    e To select other images to be erased   repeat s
153. ght source within the image changes  the screen might flicker  If  this happens  stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under  the actual light source to be used        f you point the camera in a different direction  it might throw off the Live  View image   s correct brightness momentarily  Wait until the brightness  level stabilizes before shooting       If there is a very bright light source in the picture  such as the sun  the  bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor  However  the actual  captured image will correctly show the bright area      In low light  if you set the      LCD brightness  to a bright setting   chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image  However  the  chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image      When you magnify the image  the image sharpness may look more  pronounced than it really is     139    Q Live View Shooting Cautions    Shooting Result Cautions     When you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long  period  the camera   s internal temperature may increase and it can  degrade image quality  Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting  images    e Before taking a long exposure  stop Live View shooting temporarily and  wait several minutes before shooting  This is to prevent image  degradation      Live View shooting in high temperatures and at high ISO speeds may  cause noise or irregular colors      When you shoot at high ISO speeds  noise  banding  dots of light  etc    may b
154. gt  button      In Creative Zone modes  you can  press the  lt 4 gt  button anytime to take  flash pictures      While the flash is recycling      buSY     is displayed in the viewfinder  and   BUSY 4  is displayed on the LCD  monitor    2 Press the shutter button halfway      Inthe bottom left of the viewfinder   check that the  lt   gt  icon is lit    3 Take the picture      When focus is achieved and you  press the shutter button completely   the flash will fire for the picture     G  gt                 Effective Flash Range  Approx  in meters feet                                            EF S 18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS Il  Poe EF S 18 135mm    3 5 5 6 IS  Wide Angle Telephoto  100 1 3 7 3 3 12 1 1 2 3 3 3 7 5  200 1 5 3 3 3 174 1 3 3 3 3  108  A00 AUTO    1 7 4 3 3 24 3 1 46 3 3 15 1  800 1 10 5 3 3 34 4 1 66 3 3 217  1600 1 14 9 3 3   48 9 1 9 3 3 3  30 5  3200 1 21 0 3 3   68 9 1 13 1 3 3   43 0  6400 1 29 7 3 3 97 4 1  18 6 3 3  61 0  H  12800   1 42 0 3 3 137 8   1 26 3 3 3 863         For fill flash  the ISO speed might be set lower than ISO 400     90       4 Using the Built in Flash    X   Shooting Tips  e If the subject is far away  increase the ISO speed  p 79    By increasing the ISO speed  you can extend the flash range     e In bright light  decrease the ISO speed   If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks  decrease the ISO  speed    e  Detach the lens hood and keep at least 1 meter 3 3 feet away  from the subject   If the lens has a hood attached or you a
155. h off   The flash is disabled     Fl   When using  lt  gt  or  lt Wc gt   see the il notes on page 89     When using  lt   gt   see    Disabling Flash    on page 55     58    9 Shooting Portraits me    The  lt  gt   Portrait  mode blurs the background to make the human  subject stand out  It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer     D Portrait    Standard setting    Default setting        Olam   a   514        vy    29  Shooting Tips      The further the distance between the subject and background   the better   The further the distance between the subject and background  the  more blurred the background will look  The subject will also stand  out better in front of a plain  dark background     e Use a telephoto lens   If you have a zoom lens  use the telephoto end to fill the frame with  the subject from the waist up  Move in closer if necessary     e  Focus the face   Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red     Al e Ifyou hold down the shutter button  you can shoot continuously to obtain  different poses and facial expressions   max  approx  3 7 shots sec    e  f necessary  the built in flash will pop up automatically     59    24 Shooting Landscapes mE    Use the  lt    gt   Landscape  mode for wide scenery  night scenes  or to  have everything in focus from near to far  For vivid blues and greens   and very sharp and crisp images        Landscape    Standard setting    Default setting  E    TO a a   514        X  Shooting Tips    e With a zoom le
156. he  lt      gt   dial to set it     Drive mode    310    Quick Reference Guide       Nomenclature    Power switch Mode Dial     lt ISO gt  ISO speed  setting button    si ee      Main Dial          Shutter  button     lt     gt  Live View shooting   Movie shooting button FEZA Ock button   lt E  gt  AF point  selection button         A a ear ike  we H   Cross keys      TT pap Access lamp   y   lt  Avi  gt  Aperture Exposure  compensation button  lt   gt  Setting button    311    Quick Reference Guide    Shooting Settings Display  Shutter speed  Shooting mode    Exposure level  ii   iN 7A V B a  EII    Auto Lighting  indicator EST  Optimizer    Aperture  ISO speed                    Built in flash  func  setting       Quick Control   Image recording  icon quality  Battery check eier oe shots  wna   aa   a  elering mode    OK   NG Drive mode    Viewfinder Information AF point activation indicator  lt   gt     l Spot metering  3 circle          AF points    Focus  confirmation light    Max  burst    AE lock  Flash ready    Flash exposure  compensation Monochrome shooting  Shutter speed ISO speed  Aperture Exposure level indicator    312    Quick Reference Guide       Basic Zone Modes  fiat j All the settings necessary for  shooting are set automatically  You       just press the shutter button  and  6 the camera does the rest   Sic Zone  G3 Scene Intelligent Auto 24 Landscape  Flash Off  amp  Close up  Creative Auto Sports  D Portrait Bj Night Portrait      Pressing the  lt  Q  g
157. he AF mode is  lt   M gt   the AF     Live mode point will also be displayed        Select a function and set it    e Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select a  function     gt  The selected function and Feature  guide  p 48  will appear      Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key or turn the   lt    gt  dial to change the setting   Pressing  lt  gt  will display the  respective function   s setting screen     Fl The image recording quality setting will be reflected in all shooting modes     149    U Setting the Movie recording Size mum       Movie rec  size Under the  Gim   tab   Movie rec  size   1920x1080 25fps 60 00 enables you to select the movie   s image       size      x      and frame rate  I   Movie rec  size    mE Tbe Ga abo TS Boe  frames recorded per second   The  x  Digital zoom 4   frame rate  switches automatically   re BS depending on the      Video system   setting           Image size   1920x1080    Full High Definition  Full HD  recording quality    1280x720    High Definition  HD  recording quality    640x480    Standard definition recording quality  The aspect  ratio will be 4 3     e Frame rate  fps  frames per second    T60   Io    For areas where the TV format is NTSC  North  America  Japan  Korea  Mexico  etc        i0   T5    For areas where the TV format is PAL  Europe   Russia  China  Australia  etc      m    Mainly for motion pictures     F When  1920x1080  is set as movie recording size  you can use the digital  zoom  For the setting procedure  see page 152
158. he LCD monitor   p 31     When the LCD monitor displays the  date time setting screen  see page    34  E       Focus the subject   p 40      Look through the viewfinder and  aim the viewfinder center over the  subject      Press the shutter button halfway   and the camera will focus the  subject       If necessary  the built in flash will  pop up automatically        Take the picture   p 40     Press the shutter button completely  to take the picture           Jaga      Review the picture   p 166   se       The captured image will be  displayed for approx  2 sec  on the  LCD monitor   e To display the image again  press  the  lt L  gt  button  p 71                    To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor  see    Live View  Shooting     p 123       To view the images captured so far  see    Image Playback     p 71     e  To delete an image  see    Erasing Images     p 224      17    Nomenclature lau  The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the    Basic  Shooting and Image Playback    section     Power switch  p 32         Mode Dial  p 22                       Built in flash AF assist beam   p 90 86      lt DISP  gt  Display button   p 47 152 167 179             EF Lens mount index  p 36     m  EF S Lens mount index  p 36    lt ISO gt  ISO speed    setting button  p 79  Flash sync contacts        lt  gt  Main Dial Hot shoe  p 263     Shutter button   p 40  R  O     lt     gt  Focal plane  mark  p 61        Strap mount    N  p 25                 Red eye A    
159. he functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in  the  lt Tv gt    lt Av gt   and  lt M gt  modes      To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode   see page 268      The    mark shown on the right of the page title indicates  that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes   p 22      J  About the Main Dial Pointer    1 125 The pointer icon  lt   N  gt  displayed  together with the shutter speed  aperture    setting  or exposure compensation  amount indicates that you can turn the   lt    gt  dial to adjust the respective  setting     F5 6       TV  Action Shots memm    You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the  lt Tv gt    Shutter priority AE  mode on the Mode Dial      lt Tv gt  stands for Time value        TSt det  ah    7 Frozen action   Slow shutter speed  1 30 sec    Fast shutter speed  1 2000 sec               KA 1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt  Tv gt            2 Set the desired shutter speed     See    Shooting Tips    for advice on  setting the shutter speed     Turning the  lt  gt  dial to the right  sets a faster shutter speed  and  turning it to the left sets a slower one     3 Take the picture      When you focus and press the  shutter button completely  the picture  will be taken at the selected shutter  speed           Gl Shutter Speed Display  The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction  However  the  viewfinder displays only the denominator  Also     0 5    indicates 0 5 sec  and     15    is 15 s
160. he skipping duration will correspond to the  number of seconds set under  Video snapshot   approx  2 sec   4 sec   or 8 sec       155    MM  Taking Video Snapshots  i a a a SS     Q   You can add to an album only video snapshots having the same duration  approx   2 sec   4 sec   or 8 sec  each   If you stop shooting a video snapshot before the set  shooting duration elapses  the video snapshot will be added to the preceding  album  And a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots      Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots  a  new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots     Changing the  Movie rec  size   p 150      Changing the  Video snapshot  shooting duration  p 153      Changing the  Sound rec   setting from  Auto Manual  to  Disable  or   from  Disable  to  Auto Manual   p 160     Opening closing the card slot cover or battery compartment cover    Interrupting the use of AC Adapter Kit ACK E8  sold separately     Updating the firmware    e  You cannot change the order of the video snapshots in an album or add   more video snapshots to the album later    e  You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot      The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate  Depending on the   frame rate  the shooting duration displayed during playback might not be exact     Playing an Album    You can playback a completed album in the same way as a normal  movie  For details  see pages 212 and 217   00
161. he telephoto end will make the  subject look larger     61      Shooting Moving Subjects mua    To photograph a moving subject  whether it is a child running or a  moving vehicle  use the  lt  gt   Sports  mode     Standard setting    Default setting        aL   514        wy     z9  Shooting Tips    e Use a telephoto lens   Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar     e Use the center AF point to focus   Aim the center AF point over the subject  then press the shutter  button halfway to autofocus  During autofocusing  the beeper will  continue beeping softly  If focus cannot be achieved  the focus  confirmation light  lt   gt  will blink   When you want to take the picture  press the shutter button  completely  If you hold down the shutter button  continuous shooting   max  approx  3 7 shots per sec   and autofocusing will take effect     Q Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur  the viewfinder   s  shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink  Hold the camera steady  and shoot     62    Fi Shooting Portraits at Night mum    To shoot someone at night and obtain a natural looking exposure in the  background  use the  lt B gt   Night Portrait  mode        Night Portrait    The use of a tripod  is recommended    Standard setting      514        yt    sy Shooting Tips    e Use a wide angle lens and a tripod   When using a zoom lens  use the wide angle end to obtain a wide  night view  Also  use a tripod to prevent camera shake       Ke
162. how only the settings currently applied     21    Nomenclature    Mode Dial    The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes  Creative Zone modes   and the Movie shooting mode     Creative Zone                These modes give you more control for  shooting various subjects     P       Program AE  p 74    Tv   Shutter priority AE  p 94   Av   Aperture priority AE  p 96   M   Manual peruse  p  39      p 101     Basic Zone    All you do is press the shutter button   The camera sets everything to suit the  subject     GS   Scene Intelligent Auto  p 50  f    Flash Off  p 55  G    Creative Auto  p 56             Movie shooting   K  p 141   Image Zone           Portrait  p 59    2a   Landscape  p 60    Ww   Close up  p 61    4A   Sports  p 62    Bi  Night Portrait  p 63   22    Nomenclature       Lens  Lens without a distance scale    Focusing ring  p 87 138  Focus mode switch  p 36           Zoom ring  p 37     Hood mount Zoom position index  p 37      p 294     Filter thread   front of lens   p 294     Image Stabilizer switch  p 38 Contacts  p 15     Lens mount index  p 36        Lens with a distance scale    Focus mode switch  p 36              Hood mount   p 294     Zoom position index  p 37     Distance scale    Filter thread   front of lens   p 294     Zoom ring  p 37     Focusing ring  p 87 138  Contacts  p 15     Image Stabilizer switch  p 38  Lens mount index  p 36     23    Nomenclature    Battery Charger LC E8  Charger for Battery Pack LP E8  p 26      Battery pack slot    
163. humid locations     Lens  After detaching the lens from the camera  attach the lens Contacts  caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid  scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts     Cautions During Prolonged Use  If you use continuous shooting  Live View shooting  or  movie shooting for a prolonged period  the camera may  become hot  Although this is not a malfunction  holding the  hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin burns        About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor  Besides dust entering the camera from outside  in rare cases lubricant from the  camera   s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor  In case visible  spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning  having the sensor cleaned  by a Canon Service Center is recommended     15    Quick Start Guide memme    1       Insert the battery   p 28     To charge the battery  see page 26              Insert a card   p 29   e With the card   s label facing  toward the camera back                 Attach the lens   p 36    e Align the lens    white or red index  with the camera   s index in the  matching color         Red index  y Sean              Set the lens focus mode switch  to  lt AF gt    p 36           RY  BA  Fe ES          Set the power switch to  lt ON gt     and set the Mode Dial to  lt  J gt     Scene Intelligent Auto    p 50    e   All the necessary camera settings  will be set automatically              16    Quick Start Guide       Flip out t
164. ible dust  still remains  you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for  erasing the dust spots later  The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital  Photo Professional  provided software  p 302  to erase the dust spots  automatically        Preparation      Geta solid white object  paper  etc        Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer      Set the lens focus mode switch to  lt MF gt  and set the focus to infinity   cc   If the lens has no distance scale  look at the front of the lens and  turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way     Obtain the Dust Delete Data    1 Select  Dust Delete Data    Dust Delete Data e Under the  Ai  tab  select  Dust A  zian Delete Data   then press  lt   gt         Dust Delete Data 2 Select  OK      Obtain data for removing e Select  OK  and press  lt   gt   After       dust using software  the automatic self cleaning of the  Refer to manual for details       sensor is performed  a message will  ei SL appear  Although there will be a  Cancel OK shutter sound  a picture is not taken     Dust Delete Data    Ar Cy  Fully press the shutter    button  when ready    Sensor cleaning       185    CEM Appending Dust Delete Data         3 Photograph a solid white object    e Ata distance of 20 cm   30 cm  0 7 ft     1 0 ft    fill the viewfinder with a  patternless  solid white object and  take a picture     gt  The picture will be taken in aperture   priority AE mode at an aperture of     22      Since the image will not be saved  the  data ca
165. ill moment lasting approx  1 sec    e  The captured still photo will be recorded to the card  and the movie  shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is  displayed      The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the  card    e Functions particular to still shooting are shown below  Other  functions will be the same as for movie shooting        Function Settings    As set in  A Quality     When the movie recording size is  1920x1080  or   1280x720   the aspect ratio will be 16 9  When the  size is  640x480   the aspect ratio will be 4 3       Autoexposure shooting  Shutter speed and  aperture automatically set  displayed when   Exposure setting pressing the shutter button halfway        Manual exposure shooting  Shutter speed and  aperture manually set        Image recording quality                AEB Canceled  Drive mode Single shooting  Self timer not possible   Flash Flash off                148    Shooting Function Settings mx    Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here      Q  Quick Control    While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor  you can press the   lt  Q  gt  button to set the AF mode  white balance  Picture Style  Auto   Lighting Optimizer  image recording quality  for still photos   movie    recording size  movie digital zoom  and video snapshots     1 Press the  lt  Q  gt  button   610    gt  The functions settable with Quick  Control will appear on the left of the      screen   a OF o   If t
166. ing automatically  p 64  268   Also  to  prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations  major  shooting settings cannot be changed in fully automatic modes                 Scene Intelligent Auto    AF  brightness  flash   color tone are set  according to scene    oO  On a a   514        F About the Auto Lighting Optimizer  In Basic Zone modes  the Auto Lighting Optimizer  p 109  will  adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness  and contrast  It is also enabled by default in Creative Zone modes         ay Fully Automatic Shooting  Scene Intelligent Auto  mm    The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings  automatically  It is a fully automatic mode  Even with moving  subjects  the camera will automatically continue to focus the subject     p 53         He 1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt  J gt     TOC   AF point 2 Aim any AF point over the   subject    e All the AF points will be used to focus   and generally the closest object will  be focused      Aiming the center AF point over the  subject will make focusing easier           Focus the subject      Press the shutter button halfway  and  the lens focusing ring will rotate to  focus     gt  The dot inside the AF point achieving  focus flashes briefly in red  At the  same time  the beeper will sound and  the focus confirmation light  lt   gt  in  the viewfinder will light     gt  If necessary  the built in flash will pop   up automatically           Focus confirmation light    50    G   Full
167. inuous shooting control   oO iD O2 Wc 2  Self timer 2 sec  Sc  Self timer Continuous                The  lt 7  gt  and  lt Wc gt  drive  modes can be selected in all  shooting modes  except  lt     gt       316    Quick Reference Guide       Cs Live View Shooting      Press the  lt       gt  button to display  the Live View image       Press the shutter button halfway  to focus         Press the shutter button  7 completely to take the picture           Live View shooting settings will appear under the  0  menu  tab in Basic Zone modes and under the  G    menu tab in  Creative Zone modes     e Battery Life with Live View Shooting    Temperature No Flash 50  Flash Use  At 23  C   73  F Approx  200 shots Approx  180 shots                         317    Quick Reference Guide            Shooting Movies       Ta      Set the Mode Dial to  lt         gt      Its  D  ENS         Press the shutter button  halfway to focus     shooting a movie         To stop movie shooting  press  the  lt   g gt  button again        is    Recording movie  wa  p oy  Nor  O d  Microphone             A    318    Quick Reference Guide       Image Playback             Playback  1 Erase          319    index me    10 sec  or 2 sec  delay            e 89  1280x720  1920x1080  1st curtain sync  2nd curtain sync       4  or 9 image index display tare 202  640x480  9 point AF auto selection                     AC Adapter Kit     260  Access lamp     Accessories  A DEP    Automatic Depth of Field AE        101 
168. ions    e Shutter  Type   Shutter speeds     e Flash  Built in flash     External flash     Flash metering    Flash exposure compensation   FE lock    PC terminal     e Drive System  Drive mode     Continuous shooting speed   Max  burst     e Live View Shooting  Aspect ratio settings   Focusing     Metering modes   Metering range     Grid display     290    Electronically controlled  focal plane shutter   1 4000 sec  to 1 60 sec   Scene Intelligent Auto mode    X sync at 1 200 sec    1 4000 sec  to 30 sec   bulb  Total shutter speed range   Available range varies by shooting mode      Retractable  auto pop up flash   Guide No   Approx  13 43  ISO 100  in meters feet   Flash coverage  Approx  17mm lens angle of view  Recycling time approx  3 sec    Wireless master unit function provided   EX series Speedlite  Flash functions settable with the  camera    E TTL II autoflash    2 stops in 1 3  or 1 2 stop increments   Provided   None    Single shooting  continuous shooting  self timer with 10 sec    or 2 sec  delay and 10 sec  delay with continuous shooting   Max  approx  3 7 shots sec    JPEG Large Fine  Approx  34 shots   RAW  Approx  6 shots   RAW JPEG Large Fine  Approx  3 shots     Figures are based on Canon   s testing standards  ISO  100 and    Standard    Picture Style  using a 4GB card     3 2  4 3  16 9  1 1   Live mode  Face detection Live mode  Contrast  detection   Quick mode  Phase difference detection   Manual focusing  Approx  5x   10x magnification  possible    E
169. ity   Press  lt   gt  to display the image recording quality setting screen on the  LCD monitor  Select the desired image recording quality  then press  lt  6 gt        Flash exposure compensation    When you press  lt   gt   the flash exposure compensation setting screen  will appear  Set the flash exposure compensation  then press  lt   gt        LCD monitor On Off    Assigns the same function as the  lt DISP  gt  button       Menu display    Press  lt     gt  to display the menu screen       ISO speed    The ISO speed setting screen will appear  Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key or turn  the  lt s   gt  dial to change the ISO speed  You can also refer to the  viewfinder to set the ISO speed     256    Custom Function Settings      C Fn 11 LCD display when power ON    0  Display on  When the power switch is turned on  the shooting settings will be  displayed  p 47     1  Previous display status  If you pressed the  lt DISP  gt  button and turned off the camera while the  LCD monitor was off  the shooting settings will not be displayed when  you turn on the camera again  This helps to save battery power  The  menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used   If you pressed the  lt DISP  gt  button to display the shooting settings and  then turn off the camera  the shooting settings will be displayed when  you turn on the camera again        257    mW Registering My Menu    memm    Under the My Menu tab  you can register up to six menu options and  Custom Functi
170. ive View Shooting  e Live View shooting  gt  p 123  e Focusing  gt  p 131  e Aspect ratio  gt  p 129  e Grid display  gt  p 129    Quick Control  gt  p 128  Shooting Movies    Movie shooting  gt  p 141    Quick Control  gt  p 149  e Sound recording  gt  p 160  e Grid display  gt  p 161  e Video snapshot  gt  p 153    Movie digital zoom  gt  p 152  e  Manual exposure  gt  p 144    Image Playback    e Image review time  gt  p 166  e Single image display  gt  p 71     Shooting information   display  gt  p 226   e Index display  gt  p 202  e Image browsing    Jump display   gt  p 203    Magnify  gt  p 204  e Rotate  gt  p 205  e Ratings  gt  p 206  e  Movie playback  gt  p 212  e Editing out movie   s   first last scene  gt  p 214  e Slide show  gt  p 215    Viewing images on TV  gt  p 218    Protect  gt  p 222  e Erase  gt  p 224    Quick Control  gt  p 208  Image Editing  e Creative filters  gt  p 230  e Resize  gt  p 233  Printing  e PictBridge  gt  p 235  e Print Order  DPOF   gt  p 245    Customization    Custom Functions  C Fn   gt  p 250    e  My Menu   gt  p 258  Software  e Install   gt  p 303  e Software Instruction   Manual   gt  p 305    9    Contents memm    Introduction    Item Check List  Conventions Used in this Manual    Chapters  Contents at a Glance   Index to Features      Handling Precautions    Quick Start Guide ie  Nomenclature     ecSristees E E     1 Getting Started    Charging the  Battery  seas aa nasia nd AAAS Erai ENARE SA UARA RE  Installing and Remo
171. ive View image    e With the Live View image displayed   you can see the resulting effect    e Press the  lt    gt  button to switch to  Live View shooting        68    Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type    3 On the Quick Control screen   select the lighting or scene type        m a 5  a an a e Press the  lt  Q  gt  button  610    SURE ettings Bee e Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select  Default  K Default setting S   setting   shown in the sample screen    Shoot by lighting or scene type  Shoot by lighting or scene type   will appear on the screen   s bottom     Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key or turn the fa     lt  gt  dial to select the desired  lighting or scene type     gt  The LCD monitor will show how the  image will look with the selected  lighting or scene type     A Take the picture      To shoot while the Live View image is  displayed  press the shutter button    e To return to viewfinder shooting   press the  lt  4g gt  button to exit Live  View shooting  Then press the shutter  button completely to take the picture       f you change the shooting mode or set  the power switch to  lt OFF  gt   the setting  will revert back to  Default setting      Q e Ifyou use flash  the setting will switch to  Default setting    However  the  shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set    e If you want to set this together with  Shoot by ambience selection   set  the  Shoot by lighting or scene type  which best matches the ambience  you have set  In the 
172. ks      E     fee     221 24      E  1 Select  Rating    Histogram Brightness   Under the   1   tab  select  Rating      Image jump w  4    Slide show then press  lt  gt      Rating  Bass boost Disable  Ctrl over HDMI Disable    2 Select an image or movie      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select an  image or movie to be rated    e You can display three images by  pressing the  lt E3 Q  gt  button  To  return to the single image display   press the  lt Q  gt  button     3 Rate the image or movie      Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select a  rating     gt  The total number of images and  movies rated will be counted for each  rating      To rate another image or movie   repeat steps 2 and 3             To exit and return to the menu  press  the  lt MENU gt  button     206    Setting Ratings  fe 2858 ES i    Al The total number of a rating can be displayed up to 999  If there are 1 000 or  more images for a rating        will be displayed     Taking advantage of ratings   e With   F Image jump w  23   you can display only the rated images and  movies    e With  H Slide show   you can playback only the rated images and  movies      With Digital Photo Professional  provided software  p 302   you can  select only the rated images and movies      With Windows Vista and Windows 7  you can see the rating with the file  information display or the provided image viewer     207     Q  Quick Control During Playback mum    During playback  you can press the  lt  Q  gt  button to set any o
173. l size on the TV  However  the actual movie will be  properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set    e If you connect the camera to a TV set  p 218  221  and shoot a movie   the TV will not output any sound during the shooting  However  the  sound will be properly recorded     164    Handy Features    Silencing the Beeper  p 166    Card Reminder  p 166    Setting the Image Review Time  p 166    Setting the Auto Power off Time  p 167    Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness  p 167   Creating and Selecting a Folder  p 168    File Numbering Methods  p 170    Setting Copyright Information  p 172    Auto Rotation of Vertical Images  p 174    Checking Camera Settings  p 175    Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings  p 176   Turning the LCD Monitor Off On  p 179    Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color  p 179   Setting the Flash  p 180    Automatic Sensor Cleaning  p 184    Appending Dust Delete Data  p 185    Manual Sensor Cleaning  p 187        Handy Features mE    uam Silencing the Beeper    You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or  during self timer operation     Under the  A  tab  select  Beep   then  press  lt  gt   Select  Disable   then    Enable  lt   gt      Disable Press    g        30  Card Reminder    This prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera     a  Under the  A  tab  select  Release  Quality shutter without card   then press  peep    lt  gt   Select  Disable   then press  Release shutter without card    
174. l view and then magnify  the image  the focus might be off      Inthe X Live mode  pressing the  lt Q  gt  button will not magnify the  image     Fl e Inthe Live mode or  amp   face detection  Live mode  if you shoot a  peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus  aim the center AF point  over the subject to focus  then take the picture      The AF assist beam will not be emitted  However  if an EX series  Speedlite  sold separately  equipped with a LED light is used  the LED  light will turn on for AF assist when necessary in the Live mode and  amp    face detection  Live mode     134    Changing the Autofocus Mode  LSE SSE aS a a ee    Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult    e Low contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid color  flat  surfaces      Subjects in low light      Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the   horizontal direction    Under a light source whose brightness  color  or pattern keeps   changing    Night scenes or points of light    Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers    Extremely small subjects    Subjects at the edge of the picture    Subjects strongly reflecting light    The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject  such as an   animal in a cage     Subjects which keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep   still due to camera shake or subject blur    A subject approaching or moving away from the camera    Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus    Soft focus 
175. lave units into groups A and  B  and change the flash ratio to obtain  the desired lighting effect   23 Refer to your Speedlite   s instruction  B    AG    g    manual to set one slave unit   s slave ID  to A  Group A  and the other slave unit   s  ID to B  Group B  and position them as  shown in the illustration     A                Built in flash func  setting 1 Select  Wireless func       Hli a aa e Follow step 2 on page 194 to select  eae        a   then press  lt    gt         Wireless func       Built in flash func  setting 2 Set  Firing group  to  T  A B           Wireless func      Channel 1 ch    Firing group w 10 4     Built in flash func  setting Set the desired flash ratio and            1 take the picture    channel ES    ich e  Select  A B fire ratio  and set the  FING STOUR aR CEE flash ratio        A B exp  comp   2  1  9  A B fire ratio CER E   INFO Clear flash settings       Q If  Firing group  is set to  4  A B    group C will not fire     F The 8 1 to 1 1 to 1 8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3 1 to 1 1 to 1 3 stops  1 2   stop increments      196    Custom Wireless Flash Shooting    Fully automatic Shooting with the Built in Flash and  Multiple External Speedlites    The built in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained  on pages 195 196    The basic settings are shown below  By changing the  Firing group   setting  you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple  Speedlites complemented with the built in flash           Bui
176. layed     A Adjust the filter effect      Press the  lt  lt P gt  key to adjust the  filter effect  then press  lt  gt       For the Miniature effect  press the   lt  AY  gt  key and select the image area   within the white frame  where you  want the image to look sharp  Then  press  lt   gt         230      Creative Filters  SSS SS      5 Save the image     Select  OK  to save the image     Note the destination folder and image  a   file number  then select  OK    m Badge pe   To apply a filter to another image   Cancel Ok repeat steps 2 to 5        e To exit and return to the menu  press  the  lt MENU gt  button     F With or  M0  AL images  the image will be applied with the  Creative filter and saved as a JPEG image  If an aspect ratio has been set  for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the image  the  image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set     231      Creative Filters  jI     Creative Filter Features    e f Grainy B W  Makes the image grainy and black and white  By adjusting the  contrast  you can change the black and white effect         amp  Soft focus  Gives the image a soft look  By adjusting the blur  you can change  the degree of softness     e  amp  Fish eye effect  Gives the effect of a fish eye lens  The image will have a barrel type  distortion   Depending on the level of this filter effect  the area trimmed along  the periphery of the image changes  Also  since this filter effect will  magnify the image center  the apparent 
177. le    UEA Clear flash settings   Ifthe built in flash output is not  enough  set a higher ISO speed  p 79         F The 8 1 to 1 1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3 1 to 1 1 stops  1 2 stop  increments      194    Custom Wireless Flash Shooting    Fully automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites    Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or  separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set    The basic settings are shown below  By changing the  Firing group   setting  you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple  Speediites     Built in flash func  setting Basic settings   Built in flash CustWireless II Flash mode   E TTL Il  Flash mode  SL    E TTL Il meter    Evaluative  Wireless func      Wireless func          Channel 1 ch   R  Filia orOUR  lt All Channel    Same as slave units         INFO KAE EOR        aAll  Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit    Convenient when you need a large flash  output  All the slave Speedlites will fire at   the same output and be controlled to   obtain a standard exposure    No matter what the slave ID is  A  B  or 5  C   all the slave units will fire as one    group     Built in flash func  setting Set  Firing group  to  All   then  Flash mode E TTL II take the picture     Wireless func       Channel 1 ch  Firing group     exp  comp  FE        INFO KAE ORe ky    195    Custom Wireless Flash Shooting           a  A B   Multiple slave units in multiple groups    Divide the s
178. le this icon is displayed  the movie   s image  quality will not be affected  However  if you shoot still photos  the image  quality of the still photos may deteriorate  You should stop shooting still  photos and allow the camera to cool down      If the camera   s internal temperature further increases while the white   lt  gt  icon is displayed  a red  lt  gt  icon may start blinking  This blinking  icon is a warning that movie shooting will soon be terminated  automatically  If this happens  you will not be able to shoot again until the  camera   s internal temperature decreases  Turn off the power and let the  camera rest for a while      Movie shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause  the  lt  gt  and  lt i gt  icons to appear sooner  When not shooting  turn off  the camera     Q Movie Shooting Cautions    Recording and Image Quality      f the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer  the Image Stabilizer will  operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway   The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may  shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible  shots  If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary  you  should set the IS switch to  lt OFF gt       The camera   s built in microphone will also record camera operation  noise  Using a commercially available external microphone can prevent   or reduce  these noises from being recorded      Do not connect anythi
179. lock the exposure   then recompose and take the shot  This is called AE lock  It is effective  for backlit subjects     Focus the subject    e  Press the shutter button halfway     gt  The exposure setting will be  displayed     a 2 Press the  lt    gt  button   64       gt  The  lt   gt  icon lights in the viewfinder  to indicate that the exposure setting is  locked  AE lock     e Each time you press the  lt   gt  button   it locks the current autoexposure  setting               Recompose and take the picture      If you want to maintain the AE lock  while taking more shots  hold down  the  lt  gt  button and press the shutter  button to take another shot        AE Lock Effects       Metering Mode AF Point Selection Method  p 85    p 102  Automatic Selection Manual Selection    a AE lock is applied at the AF   AE lock is applied at the    point that achieved focus   selected AF point       A AE lock is applied at the center AF point       When the lens    focus mode switch is set to  lt MF gt   AE lock is applied at the center AF point     107                              Locking the Flash Exposure   maa    If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash  the subject  may turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background  etc   This is when you should use FE lock  After setting the proper flash  exposure for the subject  you can recompose  put the subject toward  the side  and shoot  This feature can also be used with a Canon EX   series Speedlite   
180. lt    gt  button  the  last image captured will be displayed                 2 Select an image      To view images starting with the last  image  press the  lt   lt  gt  key  To view  images starting with the first  oldest   image  press the  lt P gt  key    e Each time you press the  lt INFO  gt   button  the display format will change              P J 400 D   BA2 G1 E43  0  0  0    WEA2  GI 1D BA2   24 5MB  RAWE   Mm  Wels  sRGB  ww 3 24 28 02 2011 13 30 00    Shooting information display       Histogram    Exit the image playback    e Press the  lt   gt   gt  button to exit the  image playback and return to the  shooting settings display     71                   Creative Shooting    In the Basic Zone modes  to prevent spoiled shots   most functions are set automatically and cannot be  changed  In the  lt P gt   Program AE  mode  you can set  various functions and be more creative     e Inthe  lt P gt  mode  the camera sets the shutter speed and  aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure      The difference between the Basic Zone modes and  lt P gt  is  explained on page 268    e  The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in  the  lt Tv gt    lt Av gt   and  lt M gt  modes explained in Chapter  4      The     mark shown on the right of the page title indicates  that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes   p 22         lt P gt  stands for Program     AE stands for Auto Exposure        P  Program AE me    The camera automatically sets
181. lt   gt    EIESSETSHTUL CEE WIEHOUL CAA If there is no card installed and you press  Enable the shutter button     Card    will be       WEEE displayed in the viewfinder  and you    cannot release the shutter     Ua Setting the Image Review Time    You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor  immediately after capture  If  Off  is set  the image will not be displayed  immediately after image capture  If  Hold  is set  the image review will  be displayed up until the  Auto power off  time    During image review  if you operate any camera controls such as  pressing the shutter button halfway  the image review will end    h  Under the  A  tab  select  Image  review   then press  lt  gt   Select the  desired setting  then press  lt   gt      Image review       166    Handy Features    TEM Setting the Auto Power off Time    To save battery power  the camera turns off automatically after the set  time of idle operation elapses  You can set this auto power off time   When the camera has turned off due to auto power off  you can wake it  up by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the  following buttons   lt MENU gt    lt DISP  gt    lt P gt    lt g gt  etc    If  Off  has been set  either turn off the camera yourself or press  the  lt DISP  gt  button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery  power    Even if  Off  has been set and the camera is not used for 30 min    the LCD monitor will turn off automatically  To turn on the LCD  monitor agai
182. lt in flash func  setting Basic settings   Built in flash CustWireless M Flash mode   E TTL Il  Flash mode    E TTL Il meter    Evaluative  Wireless func  z Wireless func     4 3   Channel      ome Channel    Same as slave units    INFO Clear flash settings  Built in flash func  setting 2 Select  Firing group      Select the firing group  then set the  Wireless func  i 2  Channel flash ratio  flash exposure   amp exp  comp  2 1 9 1  compensation  and other necessary    Firing group    exp  comp  z   INFO Clear flash settings    settings before shooting            All and  amp         197    Other Settings sxe    Flash Exposure Compensation    When  Flash mode  is set to  E TTL II   flash exposure compensation  can be set  The flash exposure compensation settings  see below   which can be set will differ depending on the  Wireless func   and   Firing group  settings        Built in flash func  setting  Flash exp  comp   e  The flash exposure compensation is  Wireless func  amt  e EA  channel applied to the built in flash and all   amp exp  comp     2  1  9  1 7 external Speedlites   Firing group   exp  comp  KAT N   gt  exp  comp    MEA Clear flash settings   The flash exposure compensation is    applied to the built in flash        a exp  comp     e  The flash exposure compensation is  applied to all external Speedlites     A B exp  comp       The flash exposure compensation is  applied to both groups A and B     FE Lock    If  Flash mode  is set to  E TTL II   you can press 
183. mages because card is full  Replace card           04  gt  Replace the card  erase unnecessary images  or format the card   p 29  224  45         The built in flash could not be raised  Turn the camera off and on  o5 lagain    gt  Operate the power switch  p 32            Sensor cleaning is not possible  Turn the camera off and on  06 again    gt  Operate the power switch  p 32            10  20    Shooting is not possible due to an error  Turn the camera off and  30  40   On again or re install the battery        50  60     gt  Operate the power switch  remove and install the battery pack  70  80 again  or use a Canon lens  p 32  28                    If the error still persists  write down the error No  and contact your nearest  Canon Service Center     287    Specifications m     e Type   Type    Recording media   Image sensor size   Compatible lenses     Lens mount     e Image Sensor  Type    Effective pixels   Aspect ratio    Dust delete feature     e Recording System  Recording format   Image type     Recorded pixels     Digital  single lens reflex  AF AE camera with built in flash  SD memory card  SDHC memory card  SDXC memory card  Approx  22 3 x 14 9 mm   Canon EF lenses  including EF S lenses    35mm equivalent focal length is approx  1 6 times the  lens focal length    Canon EF mount    CMOS sensor   Approx  18 00 megapixels   3 2   Auto  Manual  Dust Delete Data appending    Design rule for Camera File System 2 0   JPEG  RAW  14 bit Canon original    RAW JPEG Larg
184. mages the  lt  3 Q  gt  button  To return to the  Date On    File No  off single image display  press the  lt  amp   gt   Sel lmage All image button   After completing the print order  press  the  lt MENU gt  button to save the print  order to the card     a    Standard   Both    5  2  O7 Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to set the number of   Quantity copies to be printed for the displayed  Total images selected image        Set up  MENU a         Index    Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to checkmark the  box  lt v  gt  and the image will be included  Index icon in the index print        Div i gt   Check mark       e By  Select  Mark all in folder  and select the folder  A print order for one  copy of all the images in the folder will be placed  If you select  Clear  all in folder  and select the folder  the print order for that folder will  all be canceled     e Allimage  If you select  Mark all on card   one copy of all the images in the  card will be set for printing  If you select  Clear all on card   the print  order will be cleared for all the images in the card     Q   Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order  even if you set    By fil    or    All image      e  When using a PictBridge printer  print no more than 400 images for one  print order  If you specify more than this  all the images might not be  printed     247    Direct Printing with DPOF memm    Print order    Q Standard 7 prints  Index 2 images  Date On  File No  Off    With a PictBridg
185. may be  necessary     E TTL II meter  DVEIE TS e  Average       Fl Even if  Flash firing  has been set to  Disable   if focus is difficult to achieve  in low light  the built in flash may still fire a series of flashes  AF assist  beam  p 86      180    MEM  Setting the Flash    eS a SS 8 EE SI     Built in flash func  setting  and  External flash func  setting     With  Built in flash func  setting  and  External flash func  setting    you can set the functions listed in the table below  The functions  displayed under  External flash func  setting  will vary depending on  the Speedlite model     Flash control e  Select  Built in flash func  setting   Flash firing Enable or  External flash func  setting    EU inet aa yells  gt  The flash functions will be displayed   Built in flash func  setting       External flash func  setting The functions not dimmed can be  External flash C Fn setting selected and set     Clear ext  flash C Fn set         Built in flash func  setting  and  External flash func   setting  Settable Functions                                Built in flash func  setting    External  Function Normal Easy Custom  ffashfunc    Page  es Wireless   Wireless   settin  Firing g    p 191   p 194    Flash mode O O 182  Shutter sync  O O 182  FEB      Wireless flash O O 189  Channel O O O 191  Flash group O 195  Flash exposure  compensation 9 S    o 104  Zoom  O                                 For  FEB   Flash exposure bracketing  and  Zoom   refer to the Speedlite   s 
186. mode bE TTL Il  Manual flash  MULTI flash  TIL  AutoExtFlash  Man ExtFlash     INFO Clear flash settings       182    MEM  Setting the Flash        lM UUM      e Clear flash settings  With the  Built in flash func  setting  or  External flash func   setting  screen displayed  press the  lt INFO  gt  button to display the  screen to clear the flash settings  When you select  OK   the  settings for the flash will be cleared     Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions    The Custom Functions displayed under  External flash C Fn setting   will vary depending on the Speedlite model     Flash control Display the Custom Function   Flash firing Enable   With the camera ready to shoot with  E TTL II meter  Evaluative IS dlit lect   Built in flash func  setting an externa peealite  selec   External flash func  setting  External flash C Fn setting   then  External flash C Fn setting   Clear ext  flash C Fn set  press  lt        gt     External flash C Fn RIR Set the Custom Function    Auto power off   TENGE e Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the fa  1 Disabled function number  then set the       function  The procedure is the same  as setting the camera   s Custom  Functions  p 250        To clear all the Custom Function  settings  select  Clear ext  flash C Fn  set   in step 1     183       Automatic Sensor Cleaning mx    Whenever you set the power switch to  lt ON gt  or  lt OFF gt   the Self  Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on  the front
187. mp w   Select the jump method     Jump 10 images e Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select the    jump method  then press  lt   gt       Display images one by one     Jump 10 images     Jump 100 images     Display by date     Display by folder     Display movies only     Display stills only     Display by image rating  p 206   Turn the  lt    gt  dial to select the  rating        NARRAR       f 3 Browse by jumping   e Press the  lt   gt   gt  button to playback    Ps images   Jump method   On the single image display  turn the  Playback position  lt  gt  dial     F   To search images according to the shooting date  select  Date      To search images according to folder  select  Folder      If the card contains both  Movies  and  Stills   select either one to  display only movies or stills      f no images match the selected  Rating   browsing through the images  with  lt    gt  is not possible     203    Q Q Magnified View memm  You can magnify a shot image by 1 5x to 10x on the LCD monitor           1 Magnify the image    e During image playback  press the   lt   gt  button     gt  The image will be magnified      If you hold down the  lt  amp  gt  button  the  image will be magnified until it  reaches the maximum magnification    e Press the  lt E Q  gt  button to reduce  the magnification  If you hold down  the button  the magnification will be   Ps  reduced to the single image display    t    ot g g Play              Magnified area position    a       2 Scroll around the
188. mpt to  disassemble the camera yourself    e Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens  viewfinder  reflex mirror  and  focusing screen  Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean  the camera body or lens  For stubborn dirt  take the camera to the nearest  Canon Service Center    e Do not touch the camera   s electrical contacts with your fingers  This is to  prevent the contacts from corroding  Corroded contacts can cause camera  misoperation    e  Ifthe camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room   condensation may form on the camera and internal parts  To prevent  condensation  first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to  the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag    e  If condensation forms on the camera  do not use the camera  This is to  avoid damaging the camera  If there is condensation  remove the lens  card  and battery from the camera  and wait until the condensation has  evaporated before using the camera    e  Ifthe camera will not be used for an extended period  remove the battery  and store the camera in a cool  dry  well ventilated location  Even while the  camera is in storage  press the shutter button a few times once in a while to  check that the camera is still working    e Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a  darkroom or chemical lab    e  Ifthe camera has not been used for an extended period  test all its functions  before using it  If you have not used
189. n     p     gt  The image will appear on the TV  screen  Nothing will be displayed on  the camera   s LCD monitor       The images will automatically be  displayed at the TV   s optimum resolution    e By pressing the  lt INFO  gt  button  you  can change the display format    e  To playback movies  see page 212           Al   Do not connect any other device   s output to the camera   s  lt HDMI OUT  gt   terminal  Doing so may cause a malfunction     Certain TVs might not be able to playback the captured images  In such  a case  use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV     The camera   s  lt  A V OUT  gt  terminal and  lt HDMI OUT  gt  terminal cannot  be used at the same time     Using HDMI CEC TV Sets    If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with  HDMI CEC   you can use the TV set   s remote control for playback operations     An HDMI standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that  you can control them with one remote control unit  E    1 Set  Ctrl over HDMI  to  Enable    e  Under the   1   tab  select  Ctrl over  HDMI   then press  lt   gt    e Select  Enable   then press  lt   gt      Ctrl over HDMI Disable  b Enable       2 Connect the camera to a TV set   e Use an HDMI cable to connect the  camera to the TV    gt  The TV   s input will switch  automatically to the HDMI port  connected to the camera     219    Viewing the Images on TV    Press the camera   s  lt   gt   gt  button     gt  An image will appear
190. n  press the  lt DISP  gt  button     ral Under the       tab  select  Auto power  Auto power off 30sec off   then press  lt G  gt   Select the desired           te setting  then press  lt   gt      4 min   b8 min   15 min   off       M4  Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness  You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read   Under the       tab  select  LCD    LCD brightness brightness   then press  lt G  gt   With the   LCD off on btn Shutter i i   DAENT ALIEN adjustment screen displayed  press the   Language  English  lt   lt P  gt  key to adjust the brightness  then  press  lt   gt     LCD brightness When checking the exposure of an    image  set the LCD monitor brightness to  4 and prevent the ambient light from  affecting the reviewed image     7  Rae SET LOLS       167    Handy Features     aia     14  Creating and Selecting a Folder    You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images  are to be saved    This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving  captured images     Create a Folder    1 Select  Select folder    Auto power off 30 sec    Under the         tab  select  Select  ein uL folder   then press  lt   gt      Format    File numbering Continuous  Select folder    Screen color       Select folder 2 Select  Create folder      LOOGANON 24    Select  Create folder   then press  aD    lt   gt  i       Select folder Create a new folder      Select  OK   then press  lt   gt      gt  Anew folder 
191. n amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up  to only  2 stops  If the exposure compensation amount exceeds  2  stops  the end of the exposure level indicator will display  lt  4 gt  or  lt   gt       The exposure compensation can also be set with     Expo  comp    AEB   p 105   If you will set exposure compensation exceeding  2 stops   you should use    Expo  comp  AEB  to set it     103    Setting Exposure Compensation         Flash Exposure Compensation    Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject  does not come out as desired  You can set the flash exposure  compensation up to  2 stops in 1 3 stop increments     1 Press the  lt  Q  gt  button   610    gt  The Quick Control screen will appear   p 41         2 Select   2       Press the  lt   lt b gt  key to select           gt   Flash exposure comp   will be  displayed at the bottom    Set the flash exposure   compensation amount      To make the flash exposure brighter   turn the  lt   gt  dial to the right   To make it darker  turn the  lt  2   gt  dial  to the left   Decreased exposure         osot O A    onest O           gt  When you press the shutter button  halfway  the  lt    4 gt  icon will appear in  the viewfinder     e After taking the picture  cancel the  flash exposure compensation by  setting it back to 0     Q If    Auto Lighting Optimizer   p 109  is set to any setting other than   Disable   the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure  compensation or decreased flash e
192. n if       Auto power off  has been set to  Off   the LCD monitor will  still turn off after the camera is idle for 30 min  Press the  lt DISP  gt   button to turn on the LCD monitor     Shooting Related Problems    No images can be shot nor recorded        e  The card is not properly inserted  p 29      Ifthe card is full  replace the card or delete unnecessary images to  make room  p 29  224      If you try to focus in the One Shot AF mode while the focus  confirmation light  lt   gt  in the viewfinder blinks  a picture cannot be F  taken  Press the shutter button halfway again to focus  or focus  manually  p 40  87      Slide the card   s write protect switch to the Write Erase setting  p 29      279    Troubleshooting Guide    The card cannot be used     e Ifa card error message is displayed  see page 30 or 287     The file numbering does not start from 0001     e Ifthe card already contains recorded images  the image number might  not start from 0001  p 170      The image is out of focus     e  Set the lens focus mode switch to  lt AF gt   p 36       To prevent camera shake  press the shutter button gently  p 39  40       Ifthe lens has an Image Stabilizer  set the IS switch to  lt ON gt     e In low light  the shutter speed may become slow  Use a faster shutter  speed  p 94   set a higher ISO speed  p 79   use flash  p 90   or use a  tripod     Horizontal stripes appear  or the exposure or color tone look  strange   e  Horizontal stripes or irregular exposures can be ca
193. n still be obtained even if there  is no card in the camera                    Dust Delete Data  gt  When the picture is taken  the camera  will start collecting the Dust Delete  THERE Data  When the Dust Delete Data is    obtained  a message will appear  Select   OK   and the menu will reappear        e Ifthe data was not obtained  successfully  a message to that effect  will appear  Follow the    Preparation     procedure on the preceding page  then  select  OK   Take the picture again     About the Dust Delete Data    After the Dust Delete Data is obtained  it is appended to all the JPEG  and RAW images captured thereafter  Before an important shoot  you  should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again    For details about using Digital Photo Professional  provided software   p 302  to erase dust spots  see the PDF Software Instruction Manual   p 305  in the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk  CD ROM     The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly  affects the image file size     Q Be sure to use a solid white object such as a new sheet of white paper  If the  paper has any pattern or design  it may be recognized as dust data and  affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software     186    mW Manual Sensor Cleaning  mau    Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can  be removed manually with a blower  etc    The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate  If the  sensor needs to be cleaned dire
194. nable   Disable 166  Release shutter Enable   Disable 166  without card  Image review Off   2 sec    4 sec    8 sec    Hold 166  Peripheral illumination Enable   Disable 110  correction  2  Playback 1  Blue   Select images   All images in folder   Unprotect  Protect images all images in folder   All images on card   222  Unprotect all images on card  Rotate Rotate vertical images 205  Erase images Select and erase images   All images in folder   224  All images on card  Print order Specify images to be printed  DPOF  245  Creative filters Grainy B W   Soft focus   Fish eye effect   230  Toy camera effect   Miniature effect  Resize Downsize the image   s pixel count 233             274       TEM Menu Settings  Es ll                                                                             Playback 2  Blue  Page  Histogram Brightness   RGB 228  p 1 image   10 images   100 images   Date    Image jump w  2  Folder   Movies   Stills   Rating 203  Slide show Playback description   Display time   Repeat   215  Transition effect   Background music  Rating  OFF    C    4 01 05   fl 206  Bass boost Disable   Enable 213  Control over HDMI Disable   Enable 219    Y Set up 1  Yellow   30 sec    1 min    2 min    4 min    8 min     Auto power off 15 min    Off 167  Auto rotate Ong  amp    On     Off 174  Format Initialize and erase data on the card 45  File numbering Continuous   Auto reset   Manual reset 170  Select folder Create and select a folder 168  Eye Fi settings  Eye Fi transmis
195. nation correction  gt  p 110  e Inserting Removing  gt  p 29 i osa  gt  p 253  Format  gt  p 45 e Noise reduction  e Release shutter without for high ISO speeds  gt  p 254  card  gt  p 166 e Highlight tone priority  gt  p 254  Lens AF  e Attaching Detaching  gt  p 36 e AF mode  gt  p 83  e Zoom  gt  p 37 e AF point selection  gt  p 85    Image Stabilizer  gt  p 38 e Manual focusing  gt  p 87  Basic Settings Drive  e Dioptric adjustment  gt  p 39 e Drive modes  gt  p 20  e Language  gt  p 35 e Continuous shooting  gt  p 88  Date Time  gt  p 34 e Self timer  gt  p 89  e Beeper  gt  p 166 e Maximum burst  gt  p 77  e Using the LCD monitor  gt  p 31     LCD Off On  gt  p 179 Shooting  e LCD brightness   ISO speed  gt  p 79  adjustment  gt  p 167 e Feature guide  gt  p 48      Quick Control  gt  p 41  Recording Images e Creative Auto  gt  p 56     Create select a folder  gt  p 168 e Program AE  gt  p 74  e File No   gt  p 170  Shutter priority AE  gt  p 94  e Aperture priority AE  gt  p 96  e  Manual exposure  gt  p 99  e Bulb  gt  p 100    Index to Features    e Mirror lockup   e Automatic Depth of field  AE  gt  p 101   e Metering mode  gt  p 102     Remote control  gt  p 261     gt  p 122    Exposure Adjustments    e  Exposure compensation  gt  p 103    e AEB  gt  p 105  e AE lock  gt  p 107  Flash  e Built in flash  gt  p 90  e Flash exposure  compensation  gt  p 104  e FE lock  gt  p 108  e External flash  gt  p 263     Flash control  gt  p 180  e Wireless flash  gt  p 189  L
196. nd Remote Switch  sold separately   p 262  is recommended      You can also use a remote controller  sold separately  p 261  for bulb  exposures  When you press the remote controller   s transmit button  the  bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec  later  Press the button  again to stop the bulb exposure     100    A DEP  Automatic Depth of Field AE mmm    Objects in the foreground and background will be in focus automatically    All the AF points will function to detect the subject  and the aperture   required to attain the necessary depth of field will be set automatically       lt A DEP gt  stands for Auto Depth of field  This mode sets the depth of field  automatically              1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt A DEP gt    Dg  L Wess J    2 Focus the subject    e Aim the AF points over the subjects  and press the shutter button halfway   4     e All the subjects covered by the AF  points flashing in red will be in focus      If focus is not achieved  the picture  cannot be taken     3 Take the picture        2 FAQ    e The aperture display in the viewfinder blinks   The exposure is correct  but the desired depth of field cannot be  obtained  Either use a wide angle lens or move farther away from  the subjects     e The shutter speed display in the viewfinder blinks   If the    30     shutter speed blinks  it means that the subject is too dark   Increase the ISO speed  If the    4000    shutter speed blinks  it means  that the subject is too bright  Decrease the ISO sp
197. nect the AV cable to the TV   set      Connect the AV cable to the TV   s  video IN terminal and audio IN  terminal     Turn on the TV and switch the  TV   s video input to select the  connected port     Set the camera   s power switch to   lt ON gt      Press the  lt   gt   gt  button     gt  The image will appear on the TV  screen  Nothing will be displayed on E  the camera   s LCD monitor       To playback movies  see page 212                    Q e Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided  Images might not  be displayed if you use a different cable     If the video system format does not match the TV   s  the images will not  be displayed properly  Set the proper video system format with      Video  system      221      gt   Protecting Images mememe    Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally     mM Protecting a Single Image          E  1 Select  Protect images    Frotect images   Under the   1   tab  select  Protect  ERE images   then press  lt   gt    Print order  gt  The protect setting screen will  Creative filters  Resize appear   omProtect images 2 Select  Select images    Select images   Select  Select images   then press  All images in folder  lt  S  Unprotect all images in folder 8   gt   All images on card  Unprotect all images on card  Image protect icon 3 Protect the image       Press the  lt   lt 4  gt  key to select the  image to be protected  then press   lt     gt      gt  When an image is protected  the   lt      gt  icon 
198. ng Quality      Select  A Quality   then press  lt   gt      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the quality  then press  lt   gt      Quality    Image recording quality    Recorded pixels    4 18M 5184x3456   514    AL aL 4M aM 4S1 dS1     2  S3  GiU 4L    S   Picture    Picture Style    Auto       Possible shots   RAW     Style        Press the  lt  342  gt  button     03008000 Picture Style  then press  lt   gt      TEA Detail set                                         Style Description  Auto Color tones optimized for the particular scene   2 35  Standard Vivid colors and sharp images     P  Portrait Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images   Landscape   Vivid blue skies and greenery and very sharp images   Monochrome  Black and white images           For  lt N gt   Neutral  and  lt  2 5f  gt   Faithful   see page 82     e Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the    309    Quick Reference Guide           Q  Quick Control      Press the  lt  Q  gt  button    gt  The Quick Control screen will  appear                        jf ONEsHor CO  amp   aL    Exposure comp   AEB setting         Shutter speed Aperture    Shooting mode       Exposure    compensation  Flash pore  AEB setting compensation    Auto Lighting    Picture Style Optimizer    Built in flash function  White    Image recording  balance    quality  Metering mode  e In Basic Zone modes  the settable functions differ depending  on the shooting mode     Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select a function  then turn t
199. ng other than an external microphone to the  camera   s external microphone IN terminal      If movie shooting is not possible due to insufficient remaining capacity of  the card  the movie recording size and movie shooting remaining time   p 146  will be displayed in red     163    Q Movie Shooting Cautions    Recording and Image Quality       f you use a card having a slow writing speed  a five level  indicator might appear on the right of the screen during aia  movie shooting  It indicates how much data has not yet been  written to the card  remaining capacity of the internal buffer  memory   The slower the card  the faster the indicator will  climb upward  If the indicator becomes full  movie shooting  will stop automatically  Indicator  If the card has a fast writing speed  the indicator will either  not appear or the level  if displayed  will hardly go upward   First  shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough   If you take still photos during movie shooting  the movie shooting might  stop  Setting a low image recording quality for still images might resolve  this problem     Playback and TV connection   e Ifthe brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting  that part  might look momentarily still when you playback the movie  In such cases   shoot movies with manual exposure    e If you connect the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable  p 218  and  shoot a movie in  1920x1080  or  1280x720   the movie being shot will  be displayed at a smal
200. ng ring to focus      After achieving focus  press the  lt A  gt    Magnified area position button to return to the normal view     Magnification 5 Take the picture     Check the focus and exposure  then  press the shutter button to take the  picture  p 124      138    ce Live View Shooting Cautions    White  lt  gt  and Red  lt i gt  Internal Temperature Warning Icons     If the camera   s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live  View shooting or a high ambient temperature  a white  lt i gt  icon will  appear  If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed  the image  quality of still photos may deteriorate  You should stop the Live View  shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again       If the camera   s internal temperature further increases while the white   lt i gt  icon is displayed  a red  lt f gt  icon will start blinking  This blinking  icon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated  automatically  If this happens  you will not be able to shoot again until the  camera   s internal temperature decreases  Turn off the power and let the  camera rest for a while      Shooting with the Live View function at a high temperature for a  prolonged period will cause the  lt  gt  and  lt i gt  icons to appear earlier   When not shooting  turn off the camera     Live View Image Cautions     Under low  or bright light conditions  the Live View image might not  reflect the brightness of the captured image      Ifthe li
201. ng the camera inside an airplane or hospital  check if it is allowed   Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane   s  instruments or the hospital   s medical equipment       To prevent fire and electrical shock  follow the safeguards below     Always insert the power plug all the way in     Do not handle a power plug with wet hands   When unplugging a power plug  grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord   Do not scratch  cut  or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord   Also do not twist or tie the cords   Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet   Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged       Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around  the power outlet  If the surrounding is dusty  humid  or oily  the dust on the power outlet  may become moist and short circuit the outlet to cause a fire     Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage      Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source  The  equipment may become hot and cause skin burns       Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod  Doing so may cause  injury  Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens       Do not leave a lens or lens attached camera under the sun without the lens cap  attached  Otherwise  the lens may concentrate the sun   s rays and cause a fire       Do not cover or wrap the battery recharging apparatus
202. nged period     Often activating only the AF without taking a picture    e Using the LCD monitor often    e Using the lens Image Stabilizer       The lens operation is powered by the camera   s battery  Depending on    the lens used  the number of possible shots may be lower     For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting  see page 125     33    ma Setting the Date and Time m     When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date time has  been reset  the Date Time setting screen will appear  Follow steps 3  and 4 to set the date time  Note that the date time appended to  recorded images will be based on this date time setting  Be sure to  set the correct date time     1 Display the menu screen     Press the  lt MENU gt  button to display  the menu screen           2 Under the       tab  select  Date    LCD brightness i Time     LED afton bin 2   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the   Language ge       tab    f      Press the  lt  AF  gt  key to select  Date   Time   then press  lt     gt                  Date Time 3 Set the date and time   Set Date Time   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the  28   02   2011 date or time number   dd mm yy   Press  lt   gt  so  lt  gt  is displayed    28702 2011    Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to set the  Ok Cancel number  then press  lt   gt    Returns  to o      A Exit the setting     Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select  OK    then press  lt  gt     gt  The date time will be set     Q If you store the camera 
203. ns  use the wide angle end   When using the wide angle end of a zoom lens  objects near and far  will be in focus better than at the telephoto end  It also adds breadth  to landscapes     e Shooting night scenes   Since the built in flash will be disabled  this  mode  lt    a  gt  is also good for night scenes   Use a tripod to prevent camera shake   If you want to photograph a person against  a night scene  set the Mode Dial to  lt Bi gt    Night Portrait  and use a tripod  p 63         60    W amp  Shooting Close ups mE    When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close  use the   lt  gt   Close up  mode  To make small things appear much larger  use a  macro lens  sold separately         Y Close up    Standard setting    Default setting       yy     9  Shooting Tips    e Use a simple background   A simple background makes the flower  etc   stand out better       Move to the subject as close as possible   Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance  Some lenses  have indications such as  lt  0 25m 0 8ft gt   The lens minimum  focusing distance is measured from the  lt   gt   focal plane  mark on  the top left of the camera to the subject  If you are too close to the  subject  the focus confirmation light  lt   gt  will blink   Under low light  the built in flash will fire  If you are too close to the  subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark  move away from  the subject     e With a zoom lens  use the telephoto end   If you have a zoom lens  using t
204. ntinuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible     e AF with shutter button during      movie recording   When  Enable  is set  AF is possible during movie shooting   However  continuous autofocusing is not possible  If you autofocus  during movie shooting  you might momentarily throw the focus way  off or change the exposure  The movie will also record the lens  operation noise   If the AF mode is set to  Quick mode   AF will be executed in  Live  mode      F   The settings under the  Gras   0m     w   menu tabs will take effect  only in the  lt     gt  mode  They will not be applied in shooting modes  other than the  lt      gt  mode      The AF mode setting will also be applied to Live View shooting     157    EW Menu Function Settings    e     Shutter AE lock button  You can change the function assigned to the shutter button   s halfway    position and to the AE lock button    e AF AE lock   Normal function  Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF   Press the  lt   gt  button for AE lock    e AE lock AF   Press the shutter button halfway for AE lock  For AF  press the   lt  gt  button  Convenient when you want to focus and meter at  different parts of the picture       AF AF lock  no AE lock   Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF  While holding  down the  lt   gt  button  press the shutter button to take a still photo  without executing AF  Convenient when you do not want to  autofocus when taking a still photo during movie shooting  AE lock  is no
205. o  1  Enable   in the      Custom Functions  C Fn    p 255      1 Focus the subject  then press the shutter button completely    gt  The mirror will swing up   2 Press the shutter button completely again    gt  The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down   e After taking the picture  set  8  Mirror lockup  to  0  Disable    X   Shooting Tips     Using the self timer  lt 3  gt   lt    2 gt  with mirror lockup   When you press the shutter button completely  the mirror locks up   then the picture is taken 10 sec  or 2 sec  later     e Remote control shooting   Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken  remote  control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent  camera shake  p 261   With Remote Controller RC 6  sold  separately  set to a 2 sec  delay  press the transmit button and the  mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec  later     Q   In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day   take the picture promptly after mirror lockup      Do not point the camera toward the sun  The sun   s heat can damage the  camera   s internal components       f you use the self timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb exposure   keep pressing the shutter button completely  self timer delay time   bulb  exposure time   If you let go of the shutter button during the self timer  countdown  there will be a shutter release sound  but no picture will be taken     Fl   Even if  lt   gt   Continuous shooting  has b
206. o select a  function      gt  The selected function and Feature  o UF guide  p 48  will be displayed    Background Blurred lt     gt Sharp   e For details on setting each function        see pages 57 58     A Take the picture     Press the shutter button completely to  take the picture     F If you change the shooting mode or turn the power switch to  lt OFF gt   the  functions you have set on this screen will revert to their default setting   However  the self timer and remote control settings will be retained     56    Creative Auto Shooting    Creative Auto       Shutter speed 1 125 Standard setting  1     Aperture F5 6  ISO speed som        Background blur   8    Oo 4A    O E    514   Battery check        Possible shots    Image recording quality    Pressing the  lt  Q  gt  button enables you to set the following      1  Shoot by ambience selection  You can set the ambience you want to convey in your images  Press  the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key or turn the  lt s  gt  dial to select the desired  ambience  You can also select it from a list by pressing  lt   gt   For  details  see page 65      2  Blurring sharpening the background    If you move the index mark toward the left  the background will look  more blurred  If you move it toward the right  the background will  look more in focus  If you want to blur the background  see    Shooting  Portraits    on page 59  Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the  lt s   gt  dial to  adjust it as desired    Depending on the lens and shoo
207. obtain a correct flash exposure  the flash output will be set  automatically  autoflash exposure  to match the automatically set  aperture  The flash sync speed can be set from 1 200 sec  to 30 sec     95    Av  Changing the Depth of Field m     To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp   set the Mode Dial to  lt  Av  gt   Aperture priority AE  to adjust the depth of  field  range of acceptable focus        lt  Av  gt  stands for Aperture value which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens        Sse  Blurred background   With a low aperture f number  f 5 6   With a high aperture f number  f 32          Ila    1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt  Av gt               Set the desired aperture      The higher the f number  the wider  the depth of field where sharper focus  is obtained in both the foreground  and background      Turning the  lt    gt  dial to the right will  set a higher f number  smaller  aperture opening   and turning it to  the left will set a lower f number   larger aperture opening     3 Take the picture    e Focus and press the shutter button  completely  The picture will be taken  with the selected aperture     2180 LT      u 10       F Aperture Display  The higher the f number  the smaller the aperture opening will be  The  apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens  If no lens is attached to  the camera     00    will be displayed for the aperture     96    Av  Changing the Depth of Field  aT Es      X   Shooting Ti
208. ollowing   EF Date taFolder   100CANON Rating    101CANON F ic highli  TOCANON T e  When  lt M   gt  is highlighted   press the  lt INFO  gt  button   KSelect images   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the    gar    desired option  then press  lt   gt   E  ta mee  Item Playback Description  All images  All the still photos and movies in the card will be played back   ma Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date     Date    will be played back   BE Folder Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back        Movies Only the movies in the card will be played back   GStills Only the still photos in the card will be played back     Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will   K Rating be played back                 215    MEW Slide Show  Auto Playback     Slide show       216       3 Set  Set up  as desired   46 images   Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select  Set    j  Aliimages up   then press  lt   gt      Si   Set the  Display time   still photos    start  Repeat    Transition effect   and  MENUS  Background music       The background music selection  procedure is explained on the next  page    e After selecting the settings  press the   lt MENU gt  button      Display time   Repeat   Slide show Slide show    Display time  Repeat bEnable  Disable     Transition effect   Background music   Slide show S Sel  Play background music  Yeni Background music Off    Slide in 1 bOn  Transition effect Slide in 2    Fade 1  Fade 
209. om m     When the image size is set to  1920x1080   Full HD   you can shoot  with an approx  3x to 10x digital zoom          Movie rec  size 1 Select  1 920x1080 Fe    spi sia e Under the       tab  set  Movie rec   Movie rec  size a size  to  1920x1080 F  by turning  mon moh o e  Gs the  lt  gt  dial   Digital zoom o fii     A 2 Set the digital zoom       Press the  lt   lt A gt   gt  key to select  54    then press  lt   gt       Press the  lt MENU gt  button to exit the  menu and return to movie shooting     3 Use digital zoom      While holding down the  lt DISP  gt   button  press the  lt Q  gt   zoom in  or   lt  3 Q  gt   zoom out  button      In step 2  you can cancel digital zoom  by selecting  OFF               Q e Using a tripod is recommended to prevent camera shake      The image cannot be magnified for focusing      Even if the AF mode has been set to  Quick mode   it will switch  automatically to  Live mode  during movie shooting  Also  in  Live  mode   the AF point is displayed larger than with other recording sizes    e  Since the image is processed digitally when using the digital zoom  the  higher the zoom magnification  the rougher it will look        f you use digital zoom  noise and light spots may be more visible    e  Focusing may be difficult if the AF point covers both a near and far  subject      Still photo shooting is not possible     152    umam Taking Video Snapshots m     You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function   A 
210. one will look   To make the skin tone less red  set it toward the plus end  The closer  it is to EJ  the more yellow the skin tone will look     F e By selecting  Default set   in step 3  you can revert the respective  Picture Style to its default parameter settings     To shoot with the Picture Style you modified  follow step 2 on page 81 to  select the modified Picture Style and then shoot     113    32  Customizing Image Characteristics    ca a eS SSS SSS    Monochrome Adjustment    For Monochrome  you can also set  Filter effect  and  Toning effect  in  addition to  Sharpness  and  Contrast  explained on the preceding    page        Filter Effect    Detail set  EM Monochrome      filter effect Or Orange  R Red  G Green    Default set        With a filter effect applied to a  monochrome image  you can make  white clouds or green trees stand out  more                                  Toning Effect    Detail set  Monochrome     Toning effect P Purple  G Green    Default set     114       Filter Sample Effects  N  None Normal black and white image with no filter effects   F The blue sky will look more natural  and the white clouds will look  Ye  Yellow f  crisper   Or  Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker  The sunset will look more  brilliant   A The blue sky will look quite dark  Fall leaves will look crisper and  R  Red    brighter   2 Skin tones and lips will look fine  Tree leaves will look crisper and  G  Green j  brighter   F  Increasing the  Contrast  will mak
211. ons whose settings you change frequently     1 Select  My Menu settings    My Menu settings e  Under the  x  tab  select  My Menu  settings   then press  lt   gt           My Menu settings 2 Select  Register to My Menu      Register to My Menu   Select  Register to My Menu   then    Sort  Delete item items press  lt   B   gt      Delete all items    Select item to register 3 Register the desired items   Quality i   Select the item to be registered  then    Beep  Release shutter without card press  lt        gt      Image review   On the confirmation dialog  select  a Correct   OK  and press  lt   gt  to register the  item   e You can register up to six items     To return to the screen in step 2   press the  lt MENU gt  button        About My Menu settings    e Sort  You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu  Select   Sort  and select the item whose order you want to change  Then  press  lt  gt   With     displayed  press the  lt  AV  gt  key to change the  order  then press  lt   gt        Delete item items and Delete all items  You can delete any of the registered items   Delete item items   deletes one item at a time  and  Delete all items  deletes all items     e Display from My Menu  When  Enable  is set  the  xX   tab will be displayed first when you  display the menu screen     258       13    Reference       This chapter provides reference information for camera  features  system accessories  etc        Using a Household Power Outlet sx    With AC Ad
212. orded  images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory  card for anything other than private enjoyment  Also be aware that  certain public performances  exhibitions  etc   may prohibit photography  even for private enjoyment         n This camera is compatible with SD memory cards  SDHC memory  Sa cards  and SDXC memory cards  This manual will refer to all these  AC cards as just    card        The camera does not come with a card for recording images   Please purchase it separately                 Item Check List    Before starting  check that all the following items have been included  with your camera  If anything is missing  contact your dealer     K Lil             Battery Pack Battery Charger    Camera LP E8 amp  LC E8 LC E8E      with eyecup and body cap   with protective cover     _              1 H  a     Interface cable Stereo AV Cable  AVC DC400ST    g       Wide Strap    EW 100DB III       EOS Solution Disk EOS Software Camera   Software CD ROM  Instruction Manuals Instruction Manual  Disk  this booklet    CD ROM       Battery Charger LC E8 or LC E8E is provided   The LC E8E comes with a  power cord        f you purchased a Lens Kit  check that the lens is included     e  Depending on the Lens Kit type  the lens instruction manual might also be  included     e Be careful not to lose any of the above items        EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk    The software Instruction Manuals are included on the CD ROM as    PDF files  See page 305 for ins
213. ough the viewfinder  focus  the subject  then press the shutter  button completely     gt  You can check the self timer operation with  the self timer lamp  beeper  and countdown  display  in seconds  on the LCD monitor     gt    Two seconds before the picture is taken  the self timer lamp will stay  on and the beeper will sound faster                             Q With  lt Wc gt   the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending on  the shooting functions settings such as the image recording quality or flash     Al e After taking self timer shots  you should check the image for proper focus and exposure  p 71     e  f you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter  button  attach the eyepiece cover  p 262   If stray light enters the  viewfinder when the picture is taken  it may throw off the exposure    e  When using the self timer to shoot only yourself  use focus lock  p 53  on  an object at about the same distance as where you will stand      To cancel the self timer after it starts  press the  lt   lt 4          gt  button  To cancel  the self timer during Live View shooting  set the power switch to  lt OFF gt      89    4 Using the Built in Flash ma    In indoors  low light  or backlit conditions in daylight  just raise the built   in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures  In the  lt P gt   mode  the shutter speed  1 60 sec    1 200 sec   will be set  automatically to prevent camera shake        Press the  lt 4 
214. ousehold power  Possible shots     Recharge        Predictive  Al Servo   Pressing completely                0008    324    Pressing halfway               cceeeeeees 40  Printing            Layout       239  Paper settings     238  Print Order  DPO    245  Printing effects        240    Tilt correction  Trimming  Program AE    Program shift     Protect  image erase protection    222        Quick Control              41  64  208  Quick mode  AF     cece 136          Recharge  Red eye reduction    Release shutter without card         166  Remote control shooting       Remote SWitCh          ccecceeeenees          PRESIZG e e eaen aNd  Revert to default settings                Rotate  image                174  205  243    Safety warnings  Saturation  SDcard  sinai  SDHC and SDXC cards             29  45  Self timer  Sensor cleaning  Sepia  Monochrome    Sharpness                Shoot by ambience selection           65  Shoot by lighting or scene type        68  Shooting information display          226  Shooting Mode              eceeeeeeeeees 22  A DEP   Automatic Depth of Field AE   101  Av  Aperture priority AE  ate  M  Manual exposure     P  Program AE      Tv  Shutter priority AE        a  Scene Intelligent Auto    Flash Off       Creative Auto    9  Portrait            59  2A  Landscape      W amp   Close up                   Bi  Night Portrait           Movie shooting    Shooting settings display            20  47  Shutter button  Shutter sync   Shutter priority AE  Singl
215. oving Subject       In the  lt   J  gt   Scene Intelligent Auto  mode  if the subject moves   distance to camera changes  during or after you focus  Al Servo AF will  take effect to focus the subject continuously  As long as you keep  aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter button  halfway  the focusing will be continuous  When you want to take the  picture  press the shutter button completely     53    GF Full Auto  Scene Intelligent Auto  Techniques          Live View Shooting    Live View shooting allows you to shoot while looking at the image on  the LCD monitor  For details  see page 123     1 Display the Live View image on  the LCD monitor   e Press the  lt g gt  button    gt  The Live View image will appear on  the LCD monitor     4 2 Focus the subject    e Aim the center AF point  lt    gt  on the  subject      Press the shutter button halfway to focus     gt  When focus is achieved  the AF point  will turn green and the beeper will  sound      lt  3 Take the picture    ii   Press the shutter button completely     gt  The picture will be taken and the  captured image is displayed on the  LCD monitor     gt  After the image review ends  the  camera will return to Live View  shooting automatically    e Press the  lt  gt  button to exit Live  View shooting                                   You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions  p 31         Normal angle Low angle    54    Disabling Flash memm    In places where flash photograph
216. peedlite will not emit the AF assist beam even if the  camera   s C Fn 7 is set to 0  2  or 3     C Fn 8 Mirror lockup    0  Disable   1  Enable  Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex  mirror action which can disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or  close up  macro  shooting  See page 122 for the mirror lockup  procedure        255    EM Custom Function Settings    beU O Ml    C Fn IV  Operation Others     om ates  Shutter AE lock button    0   1     AF AE lock  AE lock AF    Convenient when you want to focus and meter separately  Press the  lt   gt   button to autofocus  and press the shutter button halfway to apply AE lock       AF AF lock  no AE lock    In the Al Servo AF mode  you can press the  lt  gt  button to stop the AF  operation momentarily  This prevents the AF from being thrown off by  any obstacle passing between the camera and subject  The exposure is  set at the moment the picture is taken       AE AF  no AE lock    This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly   In the Al Servo AF mode  you can press the  lt  gt  button to start or stop  the Al Servo AF operation  The exposure is set at the moment the  picture is taken  Thus  the optimum focusing and exposure will always  be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment     C Fn 10 Assign SET button    You can assign a frequently used function to  lt   gt   Press  lt   gt  when the  camera is ready to shoot     0   1     Normal  disabled    Image qual
217. ps      When using an aperture with a high f number  note that camera  shake can occur in low light scenes   A higher aperture f number will make the shutter speed slower   Under low light  the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec  In such  cases  increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a  tripod       The depth of field depends not only on the aperture  but also on  the lens and on the subject distance   Since wide angle lenses have a wide depth of field  range of  acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus   you need  not set a high aperture f number to obtain a sharp picture from the  foreground to the background  On the other hand  a telephoto lens  has a narrow depth of field   And the closer the subject  the narrower the depth of field  A farther  subject will have a wider depth of field     e Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not  blink   If you press the shutter button halfway and change  the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed   the shutter speed display will also change to  maintain the same exposure  amount of light  reaching the image sensor   If you exceed the  adjustable shutter speed range  the shutter speed  display will blink to indicate that the standard  exposure cannot be obtained   If the picture will be too dark  the    30      30 sec   shutter speed  display will blink  If this happens  turn the  lt   73 gt  dial to the left to set  a lower aperture f number or increase the ISO speed   I
218. r  Disable      e  AF mode  You can select  Live mode   p 131    E Live mode   p 132   or   Quick mode   p 136     e Grid display  With  Grid 1     or  Grid 2     you can display grid lines  It can  help you level the camera vertically or horizontally                                         e Aspect ratio    The image   s aspect ratio can be set to  3 2    4 3    16 9   or  1 1    The following aspect ratios will be indicated with lines on the Live  View image   4 3   16 9   1 1    JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio   RAW images will always be saved with the  3 2  aspect ratio  Since  the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image  the  image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you  process the RAW image with the provided software  In the case of  the  4 3    16 9   and  1 1  aspect ratios  the aspect ratio lines will  appear during image playback  but the lines are not actually drawn  on the image     F The settings for these menu options will apply only to Live View  shooting  They do not take effect during viewfinder shooting     129    Gli Menu Function Settings  D E                                                  E Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count  Quality  3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1   L 5184x3456 4608x3456 5184x2912  3456x3456   18 0 megapixels     16 0 megapixels     15 1 megapixels     11 9 megapixels    M 3456x2304 3072x2304 3456x1944 2304x2304   8 0 megapixels     7 0 megapixels     6 7 megapixels     5 3 megapixels    s1 2592x1728 2
219. r AE lock AF AE lock  button  Remote control Disable  R Highlight tone   Disable  priority  Movie recording size   1920x1080  Sound recording   Auto  Metering timer 16 sec   Grid display Off  Video snapshot Disable  Exposure i Canceled  compensation  Auto Fighting Standard  Optimizer  Custom white  balance Canceled  Picture Style Auto    178                Handy Features    M Turning the LCD Monitor Off On    The shooting settings display  p 47  can be turned on or off by pressing  the shutter button halfway   Under the       tab  select  LCD off on       ich as btn   then press  lt    gt   The available  Ce ieee settings are described below  Select one   b Shutter DISP  orem  then press  lt    gt      e  Shutter btn     When you press the shutter button halfway  the  display will turn off  And when you let go of the  shutter button  the display will turn on    e  Shutter DISP   When you press the shutter button halfway  the  display will turn off  And when you let go of the  shutter button  the display will remain off  To turn on  the display  press the  lt DISP  gt  button    e  Remains on    Display remains on even when you press the shutter  button halfway  To turn off display  press the  lt DISP  gt   button     M4  Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color    You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen           El Under the       tab  select  Screen  Auto power off 30 sec  color   then press  lt   gt   Select the  a onos desired color  then pr
220. r settings Sets the paper size  type  and layout    E  Photo Cancel Returns to the screen in step 1     5  Borderless Print Starts the printing     si    The paper size  type  and layout you have set are displayed       Depending on the printer  certain settings such as the date and file  number imprinting and trimming might not be selectable     ae    Select  Paper settings     gt  lt    Si 2 Off e Select  Paper settings   then press  i 1 copies  lt   gt   Trimming j       gt  The paper settings screen will    QJ 9x13cm Paper settings  E  Photo Cancel appear   EJ Borderless Print       238    A Printing    a ae es 5    QJ Setting the Paper Size                                  es Paper size   Select the size of the paper loaded in  i the printer  then press  lt  gt    13x18cm i  TEET  gt  The paper type screen will appear   CreditCard   3  Setting the Paper Type  J W 5 Paper type   Select the type of the paper loaded in  the printer  then press  lt   gt    piiri  gt  The page layout screen will appear   E7 Setting the Page Layout  J a   Page layout   Select the page layout  then press  Bordered  lt  8   gt    Sareea  gt  The print setting screen will reappear   Default  Bordered The print will have white borders along the edges   The print will have no borders  If your printer cannot print  Borderless borderless prints  the print will have borders   Bordered El The shooting information   will be imprinted on the border on  orderec Ral 9x13cm and larger prints   XxX up Option
221. re Style           Aperture        Fl e  When  lt  amp      gt  is displayed in white  it indicates that the Live View image  brightness is close to what the captured image will look like    e If  lt A gt  is blinking  it indicates that the Live View image is not being  displayed at the suitable brightness due to low  or bright light conditions   However  the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting    e If flash is used or bulb is set  the  lt  H gt  icon and histogram will be  grayed out  for your reference   The histogram might not be properly  displayed in low  or bright light conditions     126       Shooting with the LCD Monitor  a ae eee     Final Image Simulation    The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style  white  balance  etc   in the Live View image so you can see what the captured  image will look like    During shooting  the Live View image will automatically reflect the  function settings listed below     Final image simulation during Live View shooting   e Picture Style     All parameters such as sharpness  contrast  color saturation  and color tone  will be reflected    White balance   White balance correction   Shoot by ambience selection   Shoot by lighting or scene type   Exposure   Depth of field  With depth of field preview button ON    Auto Lighting Optimizer   Peripheral illumination correction   Highlight tone priority   Aspect ratio  Image area confirmation     127    Shooting Function Settings mx    Function 
222. re marked  with the  lt     gt  icon  Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked    with the  lt  gt  icon        226    INFO  Shooting Information Display       Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode    1 125 8 0 100 0032    Ambience and    Shooting mode ambience effects    Daylight Lighting or scene  12 18 28 02 2011 13 30 00         For images taken in Basic Zone modes  the information displayed differ  depending on the shooting mode     Photos taken in the  lt C gt  mode will show  Background blur      Sample Movie Taken in Movie Mode    102 0027    Shutter speed and    aperture for movie  A A shooting    Movie shooting   M C  1 125 8 0  400 D     mode AWB  AFNOR   Recording MOLATA     sRGB Movie file size  system 18 18 28 02 2011 13 30 00       Movie recording  Size    Frame rate      If manual exposure was used  the shutter speed  aperture  and ISO speed   when set manually  will be displayed     The  lt j  gt  icon will be displayed for a video snapshot     227    INFO  Shooting Information Display  i Se ee        e About the Highlight Alert  When the shooting information is displayed  any overexposed areas of the  image will blink  To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas  set  the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again    e About the Histogram  The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and  overall brightness  The RGB histogram is for checking the color  saturation and gradation  The display can be s
223. re too close to the subject   the bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash   For important shots  check the image on the LCD monitor to make  sure the flash exposure looks natural  not dark at the bottom      M Red eye Reduction    Using the red eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can  reduce red eye  Red eye reduction will work in any shooting mode  except  lt    gt    lt Sa gt    lt A  gt   or  lt    gt      e  Under the  A  tab  select  Red eye  reduc    then press  lt   gt   Select   Enable   then press  lt    gt     e For flash photography  when you press  the shutter button halfway  the red eye   Red eye reduc      reduction lamp will light  Then when   you press the shutter button  completely  the picture will be taken        F   The red eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at  the red eye reduction lamp  when the room is well lit  or when you are  close to the subject    e  When you press the shutter button halfway  the  scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will  shrink and turn off  For best results  take the picture  after this scale display turns off    e The effectiveness of red eye reduction varies depending on the subject     91    nnp quia       Advanced Shooting    This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more  ways to shoot creatively       The first half of this chapter explains how to use the  lt Tv gt     lt Av gt    lt M gt   and  lt A DEP gt  modes on the Mode Dial    e All t
224. red  lens peripheral illumination  correction cannot be applied   e Depending on shooting conditions  noise might appear on the image  periphery   e  When using a non Canon lens  setting the correction to  Disable  is  recommended  even if  Correction data available  is displayed     F e Lens peripheral light correction is also applied when an Extender is  attached      Ifthe correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the  camera  the result will be the same as when the correction is set to   Disable     e  The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum  correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional  provided  software     e Ifthe lens does not have distance information  the correction amount will  be lower      The higher the ISO speed  the lower the correction amount will be     111    31  Customizing Image Characteristics    ma    You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters  like  Sharpness  and  Contrast   To see the resulting effects  take test  shots  To customize  Monochrome   see page 114     1 Press the  lt    313 gt  button        2 Select a Picture Style    Portrait   Select a Picture Style  then press the  0200 50 60  lt INFO  gt  button    gt  The Detail set  screen will appear     Picture Style    INFO  PIE        Detail set  EIP  Portrait 3 Select a parameter   PATTES D e  Select a parameter such as  OContrast    Sharpness   then press  lt   gt       amp Saturation    Color tone 
225. reduction   process may take the same amount of time as the exposure  You cannot  take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed      AtISO 1600 and higher  noise might be more pronounced with setting 2  than with setting 0 or 1    e With setting 1 or 2  if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image  displayed     BUSY    will be displayed during the noise reduction process   The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is  completed   You cannot take another picture   B    253    EM Custom Function Settings    ft a Sa aS SS 5S     om Sap  High ISO speed noise reduction    Reduces the noise generated in the image  Although noise reduction is  applied at all ISO speeds  it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds  At  low ISO speeds  the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced  Change  the setting to suit the noise level    0  Standard   1  Low   2  Strong   3  Disable    Q   With setting 2  the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly  decrease    e If you playback a or G  AL image with the camera or print an  image directly  the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look  minimal  You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise reduced  images with Digital Photo Professional  provided software  p 302      C Fn 6 Highlight tone priority    0  Disable   1  Enable  Improves the highlight detail  The dynamic range is expanded from the  standard 18  gray to bright highlights  The gradation between
226. resolution at the center may  degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels  So in step 4   set the filter effect while checking the resulting image     e    Toy camera effect  Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image   s  fours corners  By adjusting the color tone  you can change the color  cast     e  amp  Miniature effect  Creates a diorama effect  You can change where the image looks  sharp  In step 4  you can press the  lt INFO  gt  button to change the  orientation  vertical horizontal  of the white frame that shows where  you want the image to look sharp     232    Ci Resize mememe    You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a  new image  Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG L M S1 S2  images  JPEG  3 and RAW images cannot be resized        FT  1 Select  Resize    Protect images e Under the  2  tab  select  Resize    Rotate  Erase images then press  lt   gt    Print order  gt  The images will be displayed     Creative filters  Resize    2 Select an image     Select the image you want to resize   e By pressing the  lt  3 Q  gt  button  you  can switch to the index display and  select an image        3 Select the desired image size   e Press  lt   gt  to display the image  sizes     Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the    3 0M 345612500   desired image size  then press  lt    gt    M  si  sZ  aan nene       A Save the image     Select  OK  to save the image     Note the destination folder and image  fil
227. ry compartment cover  be careful not to swing it back  further  Otherwise  the hinge might break     28    Installing and Removing the Card mua    The card  sold separately  can be an SD  SDHC  or SDXC memory  card  The captured images are recorded onto the card   Make sure the card   s write protect switch is set upward to  enable writing erasing     Installing the Card       Open the cover     Slide the cover as shown by the  arrows to open it           2 Insert the card   e As shown by the illustration  face  the card   s label side toward you  and insert it until it clicks in place                       3 Close the cover   e  Close the cover and slide it in the  direction shown by the arrows until it  snaps shut             When you set the power switch to   lt ON gt   the number of possible shots   p 33  will be displayed on the LCD  Possible shots monitor        Fl   The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the  card  image recording quality  ISO speed  etc   e Setting  A Release shutter without card  to  Disable  will prevent you  from forgetting to insert a card  p 166      29    Installing and Removing the Card    Removing the Card       1 Open the cover     Set the power switch to  lt OFF gt    e  Make sure the access lamp is off   then open the cover   e If    Recording        is displayed  close  the cover           2 Remove the card     Gently push in the card  then let go   The card will stick out   e Pull the card straight out  then clo
228. s  B is for blue  A is amber  M is magenta   and G is green  The color in the respective direction will be corrected      f you select  Clear all   all the printing effect settings will be reverted to  the default     242    A Printing  jooo lM eG  MER        Trimming the Image    Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only  the trimmed portion as if the image was  recomposed  Do the trimming right  before printing  If you set the trimming  and then set the print settings  you may  have to set the trimming again        1 onthe print setting screen  select  Trimming      2 Set the trimming frame size  position  and aspect ratio     The image area within the trimming frame will be printed  The  trimming frame   s aspect ratio can be changed with  Paper settings      Changing the trimming frame size  When you press the  lt   gt  or  lt f Q  gt  button  the size of the  trimming frame will change  The smaller the trimming frame  the  larger the image magnification will be for printing    Moving the trimming frame  Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to move the frame over the image vertically or  horizontally  Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area    Rotating the frame  Pressing the  lt INFO  gt  button will toggle the trimming frame  between the vertical and horizontal orientations  This enables you  to create a vertical oriented print from a horizontal image    Image tilt correction  By turning the  lt   gt  dial  you can adjust the image tilt angl
229. s captured in  step 1  then press  lt   gt      gt  On the dialog screen which appears   select  OK  and the data will be   imported      When the menu reappears  press the   lt MENU gt  button to exit the menu                 A Select the custom white balance     Press the  lt A WB gt  button     Select  x   then press  lt   gt         Q   If the exposure obtained in step 1 is way off  a correct white balance  might not be obtained   e Animage captured while the Picture Style was set to  Monochrome    p 82  or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in  step 3     Fl   Instead of a white object  an 18  gray card  commercially available  can  produce a more accurate white balance   e  The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility  provided  software  p 302  will be registered under  lt  gt   If you do step 3  the data  for the registered personal white balance will be erased     118    WB Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source    ma    You can correct the white balance that has been set  This adjustment  will have the same effect as using a commercially available color  temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter  Each color  can be corrected to one of nine levels    This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature  conversion or color compensating filters        White Balance Correction    1 Select  WB Shift BKT     es Ee  BAS  e Under the  A  tab  select  WB Shift   uto Lightin  imizer   Meteng i 5 
230. s completed   a  SRLS Kent the menu will reappear   Cancel   ok         3 76 GR used 3 81 GB   For low level formatting  press the  Rly  ow level format  lt    gt  button to checkmark  Low level  Cancel oK format  with  lt  V  gt   then select  OK         45    CEM Formatting the Card    X   Execute  Format  in the following cases      The card is new    e The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer   e The card is full with images or data    e Acard related error is displayed  p 287         About Low level Formatting   e Do low level formatting if the card   s recording or reading speed seems slow  or if you want to totally erase all data in the card      Since low level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the card  the  formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting    e You can stop the low level formatting by selecting  Cancel   Even in this  case  normal formatting will have been completed and you can use the  card as usual              Q   When the card is formatted or data is erased  only the file management  information is changed  The actual data is not completely erased  Be  aware of this when selling or discarding the card  When discarding the  card  execute low level formatting or destroy the card physically to  prevent the data from being leaked    e Before using a new Eye Fi card  the software in the card must be  installed in your computer  Then format the card with the camera     Fl e  The card capacity displayed on the 
231. se  the cover                 Q   When the access lamp is lit or blinking  it indicates that images are  being written to or read by the card  being erased  or data is being  transferred  Do not open the card slot cover during this time    Also  never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or  blinking  Otherwise  it can damage the image data  card  or camera   e Removing the card   e Removing the battery      Shaking or banging the camera around       Ifthe card already contains recorded images  the image number might  not start from 0001  p 170       Do not touch the card   s contacts with your fingers or metal objects    e  f a card related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor  remove  and reinsert the card  If the error persists  use a different card   If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer  transfer all  the images and then format the card with the camera  p 45   The card  may then return to normal     30    Using the LCD Monitor sxe    After you flip out the LCD monitor  you can set menu functions  use Live  View shooting  shoot movies  and playback images and movies  You  can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor     1 Flip out the LCD monitor           g 2 Rotate the LCD monitor      When the LCD monitor is swung out   you can rotate it up or down or face it  forward toward the subject      The indicated angle is only  approximate     Face it toward you     e Normally  face the LCD monitor  toward you           
232. settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here     Q  Quick Control    While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor in Creative Zone  modes  pressing the  lt  Q  gt  button will enable you to set the AF mode   drive mode  white balance  Picture Style  Auto Lighting Optimizer   image recording quality  and built in flash settings  In Basic Zone  modes  you can set the AF mode and the settings shown in the table on  page 64     1 Press the  lt  Q  gt  button    gt  The functions settable with Quick  Control will appear on the left of the  screen   d   Ifthe AF mode is  lt  IMM  gt   the AF  Live mode points will also be displayed  You can  also select the AF point        Select a function and set it      Press the  lt  A gt  key to select a  function     gt  The selected function and Feature  guide  p 48  will appear      Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the   lt  gt  dial to change the setting   Pressing  lt   gt  will display the  respective function   s setting screen     Fl In Creative Zone modes  you can set the ISO speed by pressing the  lt ISO gt   button     128    Gi Menu Function Settings m   The menu options below are displayed     Live View shoot  Enable x x 7  AEE ends In Basic Zone modes  the Live View    Grid display Off menu options will be displayed under   Gu    and in Creative Zone modes  they  will be displayed under  Cai      Aspect ratio 3 2  Metering timer 16 sec        e Live View shooting  You can set Live View shooting to  Enable  o
233. shooting stops automatically     gt  After the LCD monitor turns off and  the access lamp stops blinking  the  confirmation screen will appear     Save as a video snapshot album      Press the  lt   lt P gt  key to select  gf  Save as album   then press  lt   gt      gt  The movie clip will be saved as the  video snapshot album   s first video  snapshot     Continue to shoot more video   snapshots      Repeat step 3 to shoot the next video  snapshot      Press the  lt   lt  gt   gt  key to select  gf  Add to album   then press  lt   gt     e  To create another video snapshot  album  select    R Save as a new  album         Quit the video snapshot shooting        ii   ie mi   Set  Video snapshot  to  Disable     E T Tee To return to normal movie   Grid display off shooting  be sure to set  Disable     USGS WEEE e Press the  lt MENU gt  button to exit the  menu and return to normal movie  shooting     154    MM  Taking Video Snapshots    eS es    Options in Steps 4 and 5       Option    Description       g   Save as album  Step 4     The movie clip will be saved as the video  snapshot album   s first video snapshot        m   Add to album  Step 5     The video snapshot just recorded will be added  to the album recorded immediately before         2 Save as a new album  Step 5     A new video snapshot album is created and  the movie clip is saved as the first video  snapshot  The new album will be a different  file from the previously recorded album         Steps 4 and 5         
234. shutter button halfway  p 40     e  You can change the auto power off time with       Auto power off    p 167      Fl If you set the power switch to  lt OFF gt  while an image is being recorded to  the card   Recording      will be displayed and the power will turn off after  the card finishes recording the image     32    Turning on the Power  E SSS   _ ____ ___S SSeS     ma  Checking the Battery Level    When the power switch is set to  lt ON gt   the battery level will be    indicated in one of four levels                  awe   514   maa    Battery level is OK         Battery level is low  but still  enough for now    a    Battery will be exhausted soon    Blinks         Battery must be recharged   Battery Life  Temperature At 23  C   73  F At 0  C   32  F  No Flash Approx  550 shots Approx  470 shots       50  Flash Use          Approx  440 shots       Approx  400 shots          e  The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8  no Live    View shooting  and CIPA  Camera  amp  Imaging Products Association  testing    standards       The Battery Grip BG E8 approximately doubles the number of possible shots    with two LP E8 batteries installed  With size AA LR6 alkaline batteries  the    number of possible shots at 23  C   73  F is approx  470 shots without flash use  and approx  270 shots with 50  flash use     Fil e  The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following    operations     e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolo
235. sion  Disable   Enable 265  Connection information    Displayed only when an Eye Fi card is used       Set up 2  Yellow   LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 167  Date Time Set the date  year  month  day  and time  hour  34  min   sec    Language   p Select the interface language 35  Video system NTSC   PAL 221  Feature guide Enable   Disable 48                   Fl e  The menu tabs and options displayed will differ for viewfinder shooting   Live View shooting  and movie shooting      The  m  Movie 1   S    Movie 2  and  Gia  Movie 3 screens  tabs   are displayed only in the movie shooting mode     275    System Map                     ST E2 270EXII 320EX 430EXII 580EXII Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite  MR 14EX MT 24EX                                                                                Eyepiece Extender q  EP EX15ll b Bundled S     M   Accessories z  Rubber Frame Ef       I   Eyecup Ef  i     gt    E series Dioptric q  Adjustment Lenses 3    Wide Strap    EW 100DB III         Semi Hard Case   cocoooooooodocooooooooooooos  EH19 L     r AC Adapter Kit  ACK E8       LP E8 LC E8 or LC E8E    F Battery Pack Battery Charger    DC Coupler  DR E8                                              J  Sj 3 Compact Power      Adapter  Battery Magazine Battery Magazine CA PS700  Battery Grip BGM E8L for two BGM E8A for    BG E8 LP E8 battery packs _size AA LR6 batteries    276    System Map             Remote  Controller Remote Switch  RC 6 RS 60E3                       
236. snapshots  you can set the shooting duration for a single  video snapshot to approx  2 sec   4 sec   or 8 sec  For details  see    page 153     F The Metering timer and Grid display settings will also be reflected in Live    View shooting     161    EW Menu Function Settings    P    0     tab    Pa    Exposure comp  2   1  Auto Lighting Optimizer    Custom White Balance  Picture Style Auto       e Exposure compensation  Although exposure compensation can be set up to  5 stops   exposure compensation for movies is restricted only up to  3 stops   For still photos  exposure compensation may extend up to  5 stops   e Auto Lighting Optimizer  The Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 109  It  will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during  movie shooting   Under the  Crm  tab  if P   Highlight tone priority  is set to   Enable   the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to   Disable  and cannot be changed     e Custom White Balance  As explained on page 117  the image for custom white balance can  be selected     e Picture Style  The Picture Style can be set as explained on page 81  It will be  applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie  shooting     162    Q White  lt  gt  and Red  lt i gt  Internal Temperature Warning Icons     If the camera   s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie  shooting or a high ambient temperature  a white  lt  gt  icon will appear   Even if you shoot a movie whi
237. ss  lt   gt     gt  The movie playback panel will appear  on the bottom     a ene een tr   PP KC AID DC SION ws vw   e Select   gt    Play   then press  lt   gt    Speaker  gt  The movie will start playing     e You can pause the movie playback by  pressing  lt   gt     e During movie playback  you can turn  the  lt  Z3  gt  dial to adjust the built in  speaker   s sound volume    e For more details on the playback  procedure  see the next page                Playing Movies             Function Playback Description  D Exit Returns to the single image display    gt  Play Pressing  lt  gt  toggles between play and stop        Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the  lt  lt   gt  key     I   Slow motion The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right        M4 First frame Displays the movie   s first frame        Each time you press  lt   gt   a single previous frame is    dll Previous frame displayed  If you hold down  lt  gt   it will rewind the movie        Each time you press  lt   gt   the movie will play frame by                    I gt  Next frame frame  If you hold down  lt    i  gt   it will fast forward the  movie     gt  gt I Last frame Displays the movie   s last frame    X Edit Displays the editing screen  p 214     Background Playback a movie with the selected background music   music   p 217     C  Playback position   mm    ss    Playback time  minutes seconds        l You can adjust the built in speaker   s  p 212  sound volume  willl Volume by turning
238. t  button will display the Quick Control screen   In the C    Sa    S Bi shooting mode  press the  lt  AV gt   key to select the function  then press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn  the  lt   gt  dial to set it as desired     4 Using the Built in Flash    Basic Zone Modes  If necessary  the built in flash will pop up automatically in  low light or backlit conditions  except in the  lt  J gt   lt    a  gt   lt    gt   modes     Creative Zone Modes    e Press the  lt 4 gt  button to raise the  built in flash  then shoot           313    Quick Reference Guide       Creative Zone Modes   You can change the camera  settings as desired to shoot in  various ways        P  TIE AE  The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and  aperture in the same way as the  lt G   gt  mode      Set the Mode Dial to  lt P gt      Tv  Shutters  priority AE  Q      Set the Mode Dial to  lt Tv gt    E AK   Turn the  lt   gt  dial to set the  F Sq desired shutter speed  then focus the  i subject    gt  The aperture will be set automatically     If the aperture display blinks  turn the     lt  243 gt  dial until it stops blinking           Av  AEDES re priority AE    Set the Mode Dial to  lt Av gt      Turn the  lt  gt  dial to set the desired  aperture  then focus the subject     P The shutter speed will be set  Av 1 125  F5 6    400 automatically     If the shutter speed display blinks  turn  the  lt    gt  dial until it stops blinking              Quick Reference Guide       AF  AF Mode          
239. t possible       AE AF  no AE lock   Press the shutter button halfway for metering  For AF  press the   lt   gt  button  AE lock is not possible     158    EM Menu Function Settings  i        es __ii      Remote control  You can use the Remote Controller RC 6  sold separately  p 261  to  start and stop the movie shooting  Set the release mode switch to   lt 2 gt   then press the transmit button  If the switch is set to  lt   gt    immediate shooting   still photo shooting will take effect     e       Highlight tone priority  If  Enable  is set  highlight detail will be improved  The dynamic  range is expanded from the standard 18  gray to bright highlights   The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother   The settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 6400  The Auto  Lighting Optimizer will also be set automatically to  Disable  and  cannot be changed     159    EM Menu Function    Settings     D    tab    Pal    Movie rec  size 1920x1080  5  Sound recording Auto    Metering timer 16 sec     Grid display Off       Video snapshot Disable    e Sound recording    Sound recording    Normally  the built in microphone will    Sound rec  Auto record monaural sound  Stereo sound    Wind filter Disable    2       Level meter    recording is possible by connecting an  external microphone equipped with a  stereo mini plug  3 5mm dia   to the  camera   s external microphone IN  terminal  p 18   When an external  microphone is connected  sound  recording will switch automa
240. t the desired setting   Some   Image review settings require you to press either  the  lt  AV  gt  or  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select it     e The current setting is indicated in    blue   a  Set the desired setting   Quality   Press  lt   gt  to set it   Beep  Release shutter without card Exit the setting   Image review 8 sec   Peripheral illumin  correct    Press the  lt MENU gt  button to return  Red eye reduc  Disable to the shooting settings display     F e In step 2  you can also turn the  lt   gt  dial to select a menu tab     The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have  pressed the  lt MENU gt  button to display the menu screen   e For details about each menu item  see page 270     44    uam Formatting the Card ma    If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or   computer  format the card with the camera    Q When the card is formatted  all images and data in the card will  be erased  Even protected images will be erased  so make  sure there is nothing you need to keep  If necessary  transfer  the images to a computer  etc   before formatting the card        Fl 1 Select  Format      Auto power off 30 sec  e  Under the        tab  select  Format    Auto rotate ono   then press  lt   gt     File numbering Continuous   Select folder    Screen color 1       Format 2 Format the card   Format card e Select  OK   then press  lt  gt    eee Ni be losi  gt  The card will be formatted   3 76 GB used 3 81 GB  gt  When the formatting i
241. t to the default     241    A Printing          lit          Adjustment of Printing Effects       In step 4 on page 240  select the printing  effect  When the  lt E  gt  icon is displayed                Uy 1 copies brightly next to  lt  INZ  gt   you can press  E PrintEffect Natural M the  lt INFO  gt  button to adjust the printing  Brightness P effect  What can be adjusted or what is  Adjust levels off displayed will depend on the selection      Brightener off  Red eye corr  off    made in step 4           e Brightness  The image brightness can be adjusted     e Adjust levels  When you select  Manual   you can change E Adjust levels  the histogram   s distribution and adjust the  image   s brightness and contrast   With the Adjust levels screen displayed  press  the  lt INFO  gt  button to change the position of  the  lt f gt   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to freely adjust  the shadow level  0 127  or highlight level   128 255     e    g Brightener  Effective in backlit conditions which can make the subject   s face look  dark  When  On  is set  the face will be brightened for printing        e Red eye corr   Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye  When  On   is set  the red eye will be corrected for printing     Fl   The     Brightener  and  Red eye corr   effects will not show on the screen     When you select  Detail set    you can adjust the  Contrast     Saturation    Color tone   and  Color balance   To adjust the  Color  balance   use the  lt   gt  key
242. table    ojo  ojojojo  ojojojojojoj    o  Auto   ISO Auto       eje   e oje    OoOjoliololo O  ISO x  speed Manus  O O O O  oO oO      iSO speed limit o  ojojoj o  Picture Automatic setting  EZA   EZA  EZ A   GA    EFA   EFA   EEA   EF  Style   Manual selection OJO  O O  o O  Shoot by ambience selection ojoljojlojolo  Shoot by lighting or scene type O O  O l0  Auto       ojojo ojo o OoOjojoloilio 9  White  Preset OOT Oo O  balance  Custom o  o  olo  o O  Correction    R o  ololo  o  Auto Lighting Optimizer               j e    ejo   ojololo  o O  L ipheral illuminati  conettion mn o jojloj  olojojolo  ojo  olo   o O  L r  aaraa noise oO oO fo  O oO  High ISO speed noise reduction                                O O  O O   O  Highlight tone priority QTO roro O O  Color  sRGB e e eojo ojojo ol ojojojo lo  space  Adobe RGB O JO O O  O  One Shot AF       o  e ojojojolo Five   Al Servo AF e O JO O O  o ARE  _ lalFocusAF  elele olofofo  o   a  Focusing  AF point selection     e e e e ejej e ojolololo AF  AF assist beam      BEI e Hm el ojojojlojo  Manual  MF  ojoj  ojojojo  o  ojojolojo  o O   1   The  amp  icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode    2   For manual exposures only    3   If used during movie shooting  it will switch to  lt  AFH  gt       4   If the AF mode is  lt  AMM  gt  during Live View shooting  the external Speedlite  will emit the AF assist beam when necessary     268    Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes  ee SS SS SS 
243. telligent Auto   e SEE Es    52    Although it is daylight  the flash popped up   For a backlit subject  the flash may pop up to help lighten the  subject s dark areas     In low light  the built in flash fired a series of flashes    Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built in flash to  fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing  This is called AF assist  beam  Its effective range is about 4 meters 13 1 feet     Although flash was used  the picture came out dark   The subject was too far away  The subject should be within 5  meters 16 4 feet from the camera     When flash was used  the bottom part of the picture came out  unnaturally dark    The subject was too close to the camera  and a shadow was created  by the lens barrel  The subject should be at least 1 meter 3 3 feet  away from the camera  If a hood has been attached to the lens   remove it before taking the flash picture      AF Full Auto  Scene Intelligent Auto  Techniques mm    Recomposing the Shot       Depending on the scene  position the subject toward the left or right to  create a balanced background and good perspective    In the  lt  J  gt   Scene Intelligent Auto  mode  while you press the shutter  button halfway to focus a still subject  the focus will be locked  You can  then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to  take the picture  This is called    focus lock     Focus lock is also possible  in other Basic Zone modes  except  lt    gt  Sports      Shooting a M
244. tep 3              Erase images A Erase the images     Press the  lt    gt  button   Erase celeciad images e Select  OK   then press  lt   gt       gt  The selected images will be erased  F    Cancel     4  Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card    You can erase all the images in a folder or card at one time  When  2T  Erase images  is set to  All images in folder  or  All images on card    all the images in the folder or card will be erased     F To also erase protected images  format the card  p 45      225    INFO  Shooting Information Display m     Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode                    Protect  Rating  Folder number   File number    Exposure compensation amount    Flash exposure  compensation amount    Histogram  Shutter speed  SAF A E E IEA    Brightness RGB     bs oF  s fa Picture Style Settings  iw wr ISO speed    Metering mode  Shooting mode    P    B  400 D  Highlight tone priority  White balance rAWB  WBA2 G1 EA3  0  0  0    RAWEY   my el sRGB Color space  12 18 LY  WAP ERROR Shooting date and  time    Image recording  quality    Playback number     Total images recorded White balance correction    Eye Fi transmission File size      With G  AL images  the file size is displayed      For still photos taken in movie shooting mode   lt     gt  will be displayed      If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image  the  lt  EM   gt  icon will  change to  lt    gt       Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation a
245. than the below for the slave unit   s  control are all set with the camera  Different types of Canon Speedlite  slave units can be used and controlled together      1  Set the Speedlite as a slave unit     2  Set the Speedlite   s transmission channel to the same one as  the camera   s       3  If you want to set the flash ratio  p 196   set the slave unit ID     4  Position the camera and slave unit s  within the range shown  below      5  Face the slave unit   s wireless sensor toward the camera  2    Wireless flash set up example    Indoors          Approx  10m   32 8ft            Outdoors         gt  c Kpprox  230ft    Mi 80                 Approx 5m Approx  7m   16 4ft    23 0ft      1  If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function  the  camera can work with any channel     2  In small rooms  the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face  the camera  The camera   s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be  received by the slave unit  With EX series Speedlite having a fixed flash head  and wireless sensor  make sure it fires  then take the picture     190    Easy Wireless Flash Shooting sx    An easy  basic  and fully automatic wireless flash shooting is explained  below     Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite    Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all  wireless flash shooting  Therefore   these steps are omitted in the other  wireless flash setups explained on  the pages hereafter                    1 Press th
246. the  lt   gt  button to  perform FE lock     198    Other Settings  SEES Se eee     Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash    When  Flash mode  is set to  Manual flash   the flash output can be set  manually  The flash output settings    a flash output    Group A  output   etc   that can be set will differ depending on the  Wireless  func   setting  see below      Built in flash func  setting  Wireless func   7 a   Built in flash CustWireless e  Firing group  S All   The manual  Flash mode Manual flash y t     flash output setting will be applied to  Wireless func         all the external Speedlites   Channel 1 ch a y  R     Sar    ual e  Firing group   4  A B    You can set  UEA Clear flash settings the flash output separately for slave       groups A and B     Wireless func         e  Firing group   All and      The  flash output can be set separately for  the external Speedlite s  and built in  flash    e  Firing group       A B        You can  set the flash output separately for O  slave groups A and B  You can also  set the flash output for the built in  flash     199                   Image Playback    This chapter explains features related to viewing photos  and movies  going into more detail than in Chapter 2     Basic Shooting and Image Playback     Here you will  find explanations about how to playback and erase  photos and movies with the camera and viewing them  on a TV set        About images taken with another camera    The camera might not be able
247. the  lt P gt  key to increase the   flash exposure and make it brighter  If   the flash exposure is too bright  press   the  lt   lt 4 gt  key to decrease the flash   exposure and make it darker      exp  comp  ns ae   INFO Clear flash settings       193    Custom Wireless Flash Shooting mx    Fully automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and  Built in Flash    This describes fully automatic wireless  flash shooting with one external  Speedlite and the built in flash    You can change the flash ratio between  the external Speedlite and built in flash  to adjust how the shadows look on the  subject    On the menu screens  the  lt 7   gt  and   lt    gt  icons refer to the external  Speedlite  and the  lt       gt  and  lt      gt   icons refer to the built in flash        Built in flash func  setting 1 Select  CustWireless      Bult in fash Custtireiess l   Follow step 5 on page 192 to select  Gene    CustWireless   then press  lt   gt      Wireless func           Channel L     Built in flash func  setting 2 Select  Wireless func       Built in flash  CustWireless e For  Wireless func    select  74 7    Flash mode E TTL Il  then press  lt  gt            Wireless func        Channel 1 ch    Built in flash func  setting Set the desired flash ratio and   Flash mode E TTL II take the picture    Wireless func   3a    Select  7     7   and set the flash ratio           j z IIF within 8 1 to 1 1  Setting a flash ratio to   EE a M  2 i the right of 1 1  up to 1 8  is not possib
248. the camera will normally focus the closest subject  automatically  Therefore  it might not always focus your target subject   In the  lt P gt    lt Tv gt    lt Av gt   and  lt M gt  modes  you can select the AF  point and use it to focus the target subject        AF point selection  Manual selection                      1 Press the  lt E   gt  button   66    gt  The selected AF point will be    displayed on the LCD monitor and in  the viewfinder     2 Select the AF point     Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select the AF  point    While looking at the viewfinder  you  can select the AF point by turning the   lt  gt  dial until the desired AF point  lights in red    When all the AF points light up   automatic AF point selection will be  set  The AF point will be selected  automatically to focus the subject   Pressing  lt   gt  toggles the AF point  selection between the center AF point  and automatic AF point selection     3 Focus the subject     Aim the selected AF point over the  subject and press the shutter button  halfway to focus     85    Selecting the AF Point      X  Shooting Tips   e When shooting a portrait up close  use One Shot AF and focus  the eyes   If you focus the eyes first  you can then recompose and the face will  remain sharp     e If it is difficult to focus  select and use the center AF point   The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points        To make it easier to focus a moving subject  set the camera to  automatic AF point sel
249. the standard for direct printing     e Digital Print Order Format  DPOF   p 245   DPOF  Digital Print Order Format  enables you to print  images recorded in the card according to your printing  instructions such as the image selection  quantity to print   etc  You can print multiple images in one batch or give the  print order to a photofinisher        Preparing to Print me    The direct printing procedure is done entirely with the camera  while you look at the LCD monitor     seats the Camera to a Printer    1 Set the camera   s power switch to  aes  lt OFF gt    F aM AM    Set up the printer   e For details  see the printer   s  instruction manual                 Connecting the camera to the   printer    e Use the interface cable provided with  the camera      Connect the cable to the camera   s   lt DIGITAL gt  terminal with the cable  plug   s  lt   lt  gt  icon facing the front of  the camera      To connect to the printer  refer to the  printer   s instruction manual                             A Turn on the printer        5 Set the camera   s power switch to      lt ON gt    P i  gt  Some printers may make a beeping  j sound   E          236    Preparing to Print  SSS SSS See    P4 PictBridge 6 Playback the image   es to e Press the  lt   gt  button    gt  The image will appear  and the  lt   gt   icon will appear on the upper left to  indicate that the camera is connected  to a printer        1 E  Bofderless    Q e  Movies cannot be printed     The camera cannot be us
250. tically to the  external microphone      Sound rec   options     Auto      Manual      Disable     160      The sound recording level will be adjusted    automatically  Auto level control will operate  automatically in response to the sound level       For advanced users  You can adjust the sound    recording level to one of 64 levels  Select  Rec  level   and look at the level meter while pressing the  lt  lt  gt  gt   key to adjust the sound recording level  While looking  at the peak hold indicator  approx  3 sec    adjust so  that the level meter sometimes lights up the    12      12  dB  mark on the right for the loudest sounds  If it  exceeds    0     the sound will be distorted       Sound will not be recorded      Wind filter     EM Menu Function Settings    When  Enable  is set  outdoor wind noise entering the microphone  will be reduced  Note that some low tone noise might also be  reduced  When shooting in places where there is no wind  set this to   Disable  for a more natural sound recording     F   The sound volume balance between L  left  and R  right  cannot be    adjusted       The 48 kHz sampling frequency will be 16 bit recordings for both L and    R     e Metering timer    You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed  AE lock    time    e Grid display  With  Grid 1                  or  Grid 2                               you can display grid lines  It can    help you level the camera vertically or horizontally     e Video snapshot  For video 
251. timizer    Pxpo comp  AEB ptt poe e Under the  A  tab  select  Auto  EEA tingo Ea Lighting Optimizer   then press  Custom White Balance  lt     gt      Auto Lighting Optimizer Select the setting   Standard e Select the desired setting  then press     lt    gt      By Sh Bh    Take the picture       The image will be recorded with the  brightness and contrast corrected if  necessary              Without correction With correction    Q   Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    if  6  Highlight tone priority  is  set to  1  Enable   the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to   Disable  and you cannot change this setting      Depending on the shooting conditions  noise might increase        f a setting other than  Disable  is set and you use exposure  compensation  flash exposure compensation  or manual exposure to  darken the exposure  the image might still come out bright  If you want a  darker exposure  set  Auto Lighting Optimizer  to  Disable  first     Fl In Basic Zone modes   Standard  is set automatically     109    ma Correcting the Image   s Dark Corners      Due to the lens characteristics  the four corners of the picture might look  darker  This phenomenon is called lens light fall off or drop in peripheral  illumination and can be corrected automatically  The default setting is   Enable   With JPEG images  the correction is done when the image is  captured  For RAW images  it can be corrected with Digital Photo  Professional  provided software  p 302      
252. ting conditions  the background  might not look so blurred  This function cannot be set  grayed out   while the built in flash is raised in the  lt 44 gt  or  lt 4 gt  mode  If flash is  used  this setting will not be applied        57    Creative Auto Shooting        3  Drive mode Flash firing    Drive mode When you press  lt    gt   the drive mode    eR or flash firing setting screen will appear     Set as desired  then press  lt   gt  to  finalize the setting and return to the  Quick Control screen        Flash firing  Auto flash       5    Drive mode  Press the  lt  lt   gt  key or turn the  lt    gt  dial to set it as   desired     lt L gt  Single shooting   Shoot one image at a time     lt m gt  Continuous shooting   While you hold down the shutter button  completely  shots will be taken continuously   You can shoot up to about 3 7 shots per sec     lt     gt  Self timer 10sec Remote control    The picture is taken 10 seconds after you  press the shutter button  A remote control  can also be used     lt Wc gt  Self timer Continuous    Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to set the number of  multiple shots  2 to 10  to be taken with the  self timer  10 seconds after you press the  shutter button  the set number of multiple  shots will be taken    Flash firing  Press the  lt  lt     gt  key or turn the  lt    gt  dial to set it as   desired     lt 4  gt  Auto flash  The flash fires automatically when necessary     lt   gt   Flashon   The flash fires at all times     lt   gt  Flas
253. tion    Creative Auto                  Custom Functions     Custom WB       Date Time              Evaluative metering             c08 102  Exposure compensation                 103  Exposure level increments             252        Extension     External Speedlite         Eye UD eee aeaaea edges   Eye Fi card  Eyepiece cover     Faithful  FE lock  Feature guide                         File name       File size      16  151  226  Filter effect           114  230  Final image simulation           127  147  Fine  Image recording quality          76  Firmware Ver              ccscceeseeeeeeeeeee 272  Fish eye effect    232  Flash  Built in flash       Custom Functions     Effective range  External Speedlite  FE lock  Flash control      Flash exposure  compensation    Flash off  Flash sync speed              252  264  Manual flash          Red eye reduction               ceee 91  Shutter sync    1st 2nd curtain   Wireless  Flash exposure compensation       104  Flash modei ere    Flash sync contacts                     Focus confirmation light  FOCUS OCK iiitide mD  Focus mode switch            36  87  138    321    Index    Focusing       AF point selection             AF assist beam        Beeper     166  Difficult to focus subjects    87  135  Manual focusing                   87  138  Out of focus     Recompose    Folder Create Select    Format  card initialization   Frame rate  Full Auto  Scene Intelligent Auto     50  Full High Definition             Grainy B W  Grid display
254. tofocus   Type  TTL secondary image registration  phase detection   AF points  9 AF points   Metering range  EV  0 5   18  at 23  C 73  F  ISO 100    Focus modes  One Shot AF  Al Servo AF  Al Focus AF  Manual focusing   MF    AF assist beam  Small series of flashes fired by built in flash    e Exposure Control  Metering modes  63 zone TTL full aperture metering  e Evaluative metering  linked to all AF points     Partial metering  approx  9  of viewfinder at center     Spot metering  approx  4  of viewfinder at center   e Center weighted average metering    Metering range  EV 1   20  at 23  C 73  F with EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens   ISO 100   Exposure control  Program AE  Scene Intelligent Auto  Flash Off  Creative    Auto  Portrait  Landscape  Close up  Sports  Night  Portrait  Program   shutter priority AE  aperture priority  AE  manual exposure  automatic depth of field AE    ISO speed  Basic Zone modes  ISO 100   3200 set automatically   Recommended Creative Zone modes   ISO 100   6400 set manually  exposure index   whole stop increments   ISO 100   6400 set    automatically  maximum ISO speed settable for ISO  Auto  or ISO expansion to    H     equivalent to ISO 12800   Exposure compensation  Manual   5 stops in 1 3  or 1 2 stop increments E  AEB   2 stops in 1 3  or 1 2 stop increments  Can be  combined with manual exposure compensation   AE lock  Auto  Applied in One Shot AF mode with evaluative  metering when focus is achieved  Manual  By AE lock button    289    Specificat
255. tructions on using the EOS Software  Instruction Manuals Disk                 Conventions Used in this Manual mae    Icons in this Manual     lt AR gt    Indicates the Main Dial    lt AV gt   lt  lt P gt    Indicates the  lt  lt  gt  gt  cross keys    lt   gt    Indicates the setting button     04  66  610  S16  Indicates that the respective function remains  active for 4 sec   6 sec   10 sec   or 16 sec   respectively after you let go of the button       In this manual  the icons and markings indicating the camera   s buttons  dials   and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the  LCD monitor     MN   Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the   lt MENU gt  button and changing the setting       If shown on the upper right of the page  it indicates that the  function is available only in the Creative Zone modes  p 22        Reference page numbers for more information     Tip or advice for better shooting      Problem solving advice      Warning to prevent shooting problems     ISNS        Supplemental information     Basic Assumptions   e All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch  has already been set to  lt ON gt   p 32        It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are  set to the default    e For explanatory purposes  the instructions show the camera attached  with an EF S 18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS Il lens     Chapters memme    For first time DSLR users  Chapters 1 and 2 explain the cam
256. urn to Live View  shooting automatically    e Press the  lt g gt  button to exit Live  View shooting           F   The image   s field of view is approx  99   when the image recording   quality is set to JPEG  L       The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View  shooting      In Creative Zone modes  you can check the depth of field by pressing the  depth of field preview button      During continuous shooting  the exposure set for the first shot will also  be applied to subsequent shots      Using  lt A DEP gt  will be the same as using  lt P gt       You can also use a remote controller  sold separately  p 261  for Live  View shooting     124       Shooting with the LCD Monitor  SEs ES ES i ee M E     Enabling Live View Shooting    Set  Live View shoot   to  Enable      Live View shoot  _b Enable  Disable    In Basic Zone modes   Live View  shoot   will be displayed under  i    and  in Creative Zone modes  it will be  displayed under  Cai         Battery Life with Live View Shooting  Approx  number of shots                 Shooting Conditions  Temperature  No Flash 50  Flash Use  At 23  C   73  F 200 180 o  At 0  C   32  F 170 150                     The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 and CIPA   Camera  amp  Imaging Products Association  testing standards    e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8  continuous Live View shooting is  possible as for approx  1 hr  30 min  at 23  C   73  F     Q e During Live View shootin
257. used by fluorescent  light  LED bulbs  or other artificial lighting during viewfinder or Live    View shooting  Also  the exposure or color tone might not come out  right  A slow shutter speed may solve the problem     280    Troubleshooting Guide    The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower     e  Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    set  5  High ISO speed noise  reduction  to  Standard    Low   or  Disable   If it is set to  Strong    the maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease   p 254     e If you shoot something that has fine detail  field of grass  etc    the file  size will be larger and the actual maximum burst might be lower than  the number mentioned on page 76     ISO 100 cannot be set   e Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    if  6  Highlight tone priority   is set to  1  Enable   ISO 100 cannot be set  If  0  Disable  is set  ISO  100 can be set  p 254   This also applies to movie shooting  p 159      The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set     e  Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    if  6  Highlight tone priority   is set to  1  Enable   the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set  If  0   Disable  is set  the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set  p 254   This  also applies to movie shooting  p 162      ISO speed  H   ISO 12800  cannot be set     e  Under      Custom Functions  C Fn    if  6  Highlight tone priority   is set to  1  Enable   the  H  ISO speed cannot be selected even when   2  ISO expansion  has been set to  1  On   
258. utter button will enable you to shoot immediately     47    Feature Guide mE    The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or  option  It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the  Quick Control screen to set a shooting function  Live View shooting   movie shooting  or playback  When you select a function or option on  the Quick Control screen  the Feature guide description is displayed   The Feature guide turns off when you further proceed with any  operation     e  Shooting mode  Sample     P    Scene Intelligent Auto Program AE    Fully automatic shooting mode Auto setting of shutter speed  with auto scene detection  and aperture  Other settings  for diverse shooting situations can be configured manually         Quick Control  Sample     accidental deletion  oT Sa ee   mal  T   rer  a al  KJ 4 5  E m Protect images  Exposure comp   AEB setting Live mode    fg  Disable Enable    Adjust image brightness     Darker    Brighter       Shooting function Live View shooting Playback    ua Disabling the Feature Guide    Select  Feature guide       Under the       tab  select  Feature  guide   then press  lt   gt   Select   Disable   then press  lt  gt      sd Enable  Feature guide    Disable       48    Basic Shooting and  Image Playback    This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes  on the Mode Dial for best results and how to playback  images     With Basic Zone modes  all you do is point and shoot and the_  camera sets everyth
259. valuative metering with the image sensor   EV 0   20  at 23  C 73  F with EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens   ISO 100    Two types    Specifications    e Movie Shooting   Movie compression  MPEG 4 AVC H 264  Variable  average  bit rate   Audio recording format  Linear PCM    Recording format  MOV   Recording size   and frame rate  1920x1080  Full HD    30p 25p 24p  1280x720  HD    60p 50p  640x480  SD    30p 25p      30p  29 97 fps  25p  25 00 fps  24p  23 976 fps  60p   59 94 fps  50p  50 00 fps    File size  1920x1080  30p 25p 24p    Approx  330 MB min   1280x720  60p 50p    Approx  330 MB min   640x480  30p 25p    Approx  82 5 MB min    Focusing  Same as focusing with Live View shooting   Metering modes  Center weighted average and evaluative metering with    the image sensor    Automatically set by the focusing mode    Metering range  EV 0   20  at 23  C 73  F with EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens  ISO 100    Exposure control  Program AE for movies and manual exposure   Exposure compensation   3 stops in 1 3 stop increments  Still photos   5 stops    ISO speed  With autoexposure shooting  Automatically set within    Recommended ISO 100   6400   exposure index  With manual exposure  ISO 100   6400 set automatically   manually   Digital zoom  Approx  3x   10x   Video snapshots  Settable to 2 sec  4 sec  8 sec    Sound recording  Built in monaural microphone    External stereo microphone terminal provided  Sound recording level adjustable  wind filter provided    Grid display  Two types   e LCD 
260. video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting 2 sec   4 sec   or 8 sec  A  collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album and can  be saved to the card as a single movie file  By changing the scene or  angle in each video snapshot  you can create dynamic short movies   A video snapshot album can also be played together with background  music  p 156  213         Video Snapshot Album Concept    g  Video E Video Video  snapshot 1 7 snapshot 2        CE snapshot x  m             Video snapshot album       Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration    In step 2 below  you can select  2 sec  movie  for example  and each  video snapshot you shoot will be 2 sec  long        Pi 1 Select  Video snapshot    Movie rec  size 1920x1080  5 e  Under the  Crm   tab  select  Video  Sound recording Auto  Metering timer 16 sec  snapshot    Grid display Off  Video snapshot Disable  Pil 2 Select the  Video snapshot        shooting duration     Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select the    Disable video snapshot shooting duration   Video snapshot  2 sec  movie h  gt    4 sec  movie then press  lt   x   8 sec  movie   Press the  lt MENU gt  button to exit the    menu and return to movie shooting     153    CEM Taking Video Snapshots       Creating a Video Snapshot Album    cae 3 Shoot the first video snapshot   e          e Press the  lt  gt  button to shoot     gt  The blue bars indicating the shooting  duration will gradually decrease  After  the set shooting duration elapses  the  
261. ving the Battery     Installing and Removing the Card    Using the LCD Monitor     Turning on the Power      Setting the Date and Time     Selecting the Interface Language    Attaching and Detaching a Lens      About the Lens Image Stabilizer   Basic Operation  raias   Q  Quick Control for Shooting Functions  TEM Menu Operations   Formatting the Card  Switching the LCD Monitor Display  Feature Guide                                        2 Basic Shooting and Image Playback    GJ Fully Automatic Shooting  Scene Intelligent Auto     GJ Full Auto  Scene Intelligent Auto  Techniques      Disabling Flash      Creative Auto Shooting    D Shooting Portraits  4 Shooting Landscapes     W Shooting Close ups    amp  Shooting Moving Subjects     Bi Shooting Portraits at Night   Q  Quick Control       Shoot by Ambience Selection   Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type    me  Pel ilimag    Playback nsa ceva vac r REEE AEEA       10    Contents    3 Creative Shooting 73    P  Program AE  Setting the Image recording Quality   ISO  Changing the ISO Speed M  24  Selecting the Subject   s Optimal Image Characteristics  Picture Style   81  AF  Changing the Autofocus Mode  AF Mode   Selecting the AF Point  Subjects Difficult to Focus   MF  Manual Focusing          Continuous Shooting        Using the Self timer       4 Using the Built in Flash    4 Advanced Shooting 93    Tv  Action Shots  Av  Changing the Depth of Field      Depth of Field Preview    M  Manual Exposure     A DEP  Automatic Depth of Fi
262. will appear on the top of  the screen      To cancel the image protection  press   lt  gt  again  The  lt    gt  icon will  disappear      To protect another image  repeat step  3     e  To exit the image protection  press  the  lt MENU gt  button  The menu will  reappear        222        Protecting Images   n  8 2 I    tM Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card    You can protect all the images in a folder or card at one time   onProtect images When you select  All images in folder   Select images or  All images on card  in  H Protect  All images in folden images   all the images in the folder or  Unprotect all images in folder 3  All images on card card will be protected   Unprotect all images on card To cancel the image protection  select   Unprotect all images in folder  or     Unprotect all images on card          MENU Bs     Q If you format the card  p 45   the protected images will also be erased     F   Movies can also be protected      Once an image is protected  it cannot be erased by the camera   s erase  function  To erase a protected image  you must first cancel the  protection      If you erase all the images  p 225   only the protected images will  remain  This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images  all at once     223    D Erasing Images mE    You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in   one batch  Protected images  p 222  will not be erased    Q Once an image is erased  it cannot be recovered  Make sure  you no lon
263. will be no Manual reset confirmation screen      Q If the file number in folder No  999 reaches 9999  shooting will not be  possible even if the card still has storage capacity  The LCD monitor will  display a message telling you to replace the card  Replace it with a new  card     Al For both JPEG and RAW images  the file name will start with    IMG_     Movie  file names will start with    MVI_     The extension will be     JPG    for JPEG  images      CR2    for RAW images  and      MOV    for movies     171    Handy Features  a TE SE     MN Setting Copyright Information      When you set the copyright information  it will be appended to the  image as Exif information        ra 1 Select  Copyright information    Custom Functions C Fn    Under the       tab  select  Copyright    Copyright information        Clear settings    Firmware Ver  1 0 0    information   then press  lt  gt         Copyright information 2 Select the option to be set    e Select  Enter author   s name  or   Enter copyright details   then press   lt G  gt      gt  The text entry screen will appear    e Select  Display copyright info   to  check the copyright information  currently set    e  Select  Delete copyright  information  to delete the copyright  information currently set        Ent ame  Enter copyright details    Enter author s name 3 Enter text    XXXXX  20000    Refer to    Text Entry Procedure    on  the next page and enter the copyright  information     e Enter up to 63 alphanumeric  charact
264. witched with   F  Histogram      Brightness  Display  This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of  the image   s brightness level  The horizontal axis  indicates the brightness level  darker on the left and  brighter on the right   while the vertical axis indicates Dark image  how many pixels exist for each brightness level  The  more pixels there are toward the left  the darker the  image  And the more pixels there are toward the right   the brighter the image  If there are too many pixels on  the left  the shadow detail will be lost  And if there are  too many pixels on the right  the highlight detail will be  lost  The gradation in between will be reproduced  By Bright image  checking the image and its brightness histogram  you  can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation     RGB  Display  This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color   s  brightness level in the image  RGB or red  green  and blue   The horizontal  axis indicates the color   s brightness level  darker on the left and brighter  on the right   while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for  each color brightness level  The more pixels there are toward the left  the  darker and less prominent the color  And the more pixels there are toward  the right  the brighter and denser the color  If there are too many pixels on  the left  the respective color information will be lacking  And if there are too  many pixels on the right  the color will 
265. with a higher one up  folder number is created     Create folder 101       168    Handy Features    i SS eee   Selecting a Folder    Lowest file number   With the folder selection screen  Number of images displayed  select a folder and press  in folder  lt    gt    Select folder  gt  The folder where the captured  TOOCANON   525 ew G5 0001 images will be saved is selected   Sie   e Subsequent captured images will be  103CANON   211   recorded into the selected folder     TOSCANON     Create folder    104CANON vi 105 0005  Tania   ea  b        Folder name    Highest file number    About Folders   As with    100CANON    for example  the folder name starts with three digits   folder number  followed by five alphanumeric characters  A folder can contain  up to 9999 images  file No  0001   9999   When a folder becomes full  a new  folder with a higher one up folder number is created automatically  Also  if  manual reset  p 171  is executed  a new folder will be created automatically   Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created     Creating Folders with a Personal Computer   With the card open on the screen  create a new folder named    DCIM     Open  the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and  organize your images  The folder name must follow the    100ABC_D    format  where the first three digits is 100   999 followed by five alphanumeric  characters  The five characters can be a combination of upper  or lower case  letters from A to Z  numerals  and
266. without the battery or if the camera   s battery  becomes exhausted  the date time might be reset  If this happens  set the  date time again     Fl The date time set will start from when you press  lt   gt  in step 4   34    ma Selecting the Interface Language mums    1       Display the menu screen     e Press the  lt MENU gt  button to display  the menu screen              Under the       tab  select   LCD bright pe  gt        Kan  Serb Shutter btn   Language i    Date Time 28 02  11 13 30   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to select the   Languages  English       tab      Press the  lt  AV  gt  key to select   Language      the fourth item from  the top   then press  lt   gt          02  11 13 30    glish         English   Norsk Romana Set the desired language   Deutsch Svenska T  rk  e  Fran  ais   Espanol me   Press the  lt  lt  gt  gt  key to select the  Nederlands EAAnviKa meniny language  then press  lt   gt    Dansk Pycckni gt ge  P     Portugu  s Polski      gt  The interface language will change   Suomi   e  tina  Italiano Magyar  Yxpaincbka    35    Attaching and Detaching a Lens sx    Attaching a Lens    Remove the caps    e  Remove the rear lens cap and the  body cap by turning them as shown  by the arrows        Attach the lens    e Align the lens    red or white index with  the camera   s index matching the  same color  Turn the lens as shown  by the arrow until it snaps in place                       On the lens  set the focus mode  switch to  lt AF gt   autofocus
267. xposure compensation has been set     F You can also set flash exposure compensation with  Built in flash func   setting  in  A Flash control   p 181      104    mW Auto Exposure Bracketing   ma    This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the  exposure automatically  up to  2 stops in 1 3 stop increments  with  three shots as shown below  You can then choose the best exposure   This is called AEB  Auto Exposure Bracketing         Standard exposure Darker exposure   Decreased exposure   Increased exposure        1 Select  Expo  comp  AEB    e Under the  G   tab  select  Expo   comp  AEB   then press  lt  gt      Exposure comp  AEB setting 2 Set the AEB amount    Darker Brighter e Turn the  lt   gt  dial to set the AEB    7  6  5  4  3  2  1 0  1  2  3  4  5  647 of amount      bihil 5   Press the  lt  lt   gt  key to set the  exposure compensation amount  If  AEB is combined with exposure  compensation  AEB will be applied  centering on the exposure  compensation amount    e Press  lt   gt  to set it      When you press the  lt MENU gt  button   AWB  Eh to exit the menu  the AEB level will be   displayed on the LCD monitor     3 Take the picture      Focus and press the shutter button  completely  The three bracketed  shots will be taken in this sequence   Standard exposure  decreased  exposure  and increased exposure     105          AEB amount    P 1 125 F5 6 AVTO  3   2  1  0  1  2 23       TEW Auto Exposure Bracketing     a ae ee SSS SSS S     Can
268. y Automatic Shooting  Scene Intelligent Auto           aA Take the picture   Ay   Press the shutter button completely to  take the picture     gt  The captured image will be displayed  for approx  2 sec  on the LCD  monitor    e Ifthe built in flash has popped up   you can push it back down with your  fingers           il The  lt  43  gt  mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature  outdoor   and sunset scenes  If the desired color tone is not obtained  use a Creative  Zone mode and select a suitable Picture Style  p 81      2 FAQ      The focus confirmation light  lt   gt  blinks and focus is not  achieved   Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast  then press the  shutter button halfway  p 40   If you are too close to the subject   move away and try again       Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously   This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points   When the AF point covering the desired subject flashes  take the  picture       The beeper continues to beep softly   The focus confirmation  light  lt   gt  does not light    It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving  subject   The focus confirmation light  lt   gt  does not light   You can  take sharp pictures of a moving subject     e Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject   If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to  lt MF gt   Manual Focus    set it to  lt AF gt   Auto Focus      51     GS Fully Automatic Shooting  Scene In
269. y is prohibited  use the  lt    amp 3 gt   Flash  Off  mode  This mode is also effective for capturing the particular  ambience of a scene  such as candlelight scenes        Flash Off    Flash disabled  Note  Dark scenes  prone to camera shake           Ol  em a   514        yt    sy Shooting Tips      Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder  blinks   Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur  the  viewfinder   s shutter speed display will blink  Hold the camera steady  or use a tripod  When using a zoom lens  use the wide angle end to  reduce blur caused by camera shake     e  Taking portraits without flash   In low light conditions  tell the subject to keep still until the picture is  taken  If the person moves during the exposure  he or she might look  blurred in the picture     55    Creative Auto Shooting m     Unlike the  lt   J  gt  Scene Intelligent Auto mode where the camera sets  everything  the  lt   4  gt  Creative Auto mode enables you to easily change  the depth of field  drive mode  and flash firing    You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your images   The default settings are the same as the  lt   J gt  mode      CA stands for Creative Auto     AY 1 Set the Mode Dial to  lt     gt    H  IX    Cx  gt  Press the  lt  Q  gt  button   610      gt  The Quick Control screen will appear                 Standard setting    Background blur 8      Set the desired function     Standard setting   Press the  lt AV gt  key t
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Tag veut surtout s`amuser - Bibliothèque et Archives Canada  DVM - Electrónica Embajadores, Tienda de electrónica en Madrid  取扱説明書 詳細操作編  Guía de Referencia de la Encuesta  9006437 thermometer IFU  Ficha técnica PowerBoom mobile 175  Philips Digital tuning clock radio AJ7000    Samsung 400UX-2 User Manual  Sony	Speakers	SU-WL700    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file